Device Manual with EtherNet/IP interface - ifm · ifm Device Manual SmartSPS AC14 with EtherNet/IP...

Device Manual

SmartSPS AC14

with EtherNet/IP interface

AC1421

AC1422

Master profile: M4

Firmware release: 3.1.2 or higher

English

7391

061

_00

_U

K

2

015-1

1-3

0

2

ifm Device Manual SmartSPS AC14 with EtherNet/IP interface (AC1421, AC1422), Firmware 3.1.2 2015-11-30

Content

Contents

1 Preliminary note 5

1.1 Legal and copyright information ........................................................................................... 6 1.2 Purpose of the document ..................................................................................................... 6 1.3 Symbols and formats used .................................................................................................. 7 1.4 Overview: User documentation for AC14 ............................................................................ 8 1.5 Getting started...................................................................................................................... 8 1.6 Modification history .............................................................................................................. 9

2 Safety instructions 10

2.1 Required background knowledge ......................................................................................11 2.2 Please note! .......................................................................................................................11 2.3 Tampering with the unit ......................................................................................................12 2.4 Start-up behaviour of the controller....................................................................................12

3 System description 13

3.1 Intended use ......................................................................................................................14 3.1.1 Permitted use ............................................................................................................................. 14 3.1.2 Prohibited use ............................................................................................................................ 14

3.2 Information concerning the device .....................................................................................15 3.2.1 Where is what on the AS-i device? ............................................................................................. 16 3.2.2 Operating elements .................................................................................................................... 17 3.2.3 Display elements ........................................................................................................................ 17 3.2.4 CODESYS PLC .......................................................................................................................... 17 3.2.5 Interfaces .................................................................................................................................... 18 3.2.6 Required accessories ................................................................................................................. 18

4 Operation 19

4.1 Control of the graphical user interface ...............................................................................20 4.1.1 Function keys ............................................................................................................................. 21 4.1.2 Arrow keys .................................................................................................................................. 21

4.2 Menu view ..........................................................................................................................22 4.2.1 Menu navigation ......................................................................................................................... 22 4.2.2 Navigation aids ........................................................................................................................... 23

4.3 Page view ...........................................................................................................................25 4.3.1 Navigate on a page .................................................................................................................... 25 4.3.2 Use navigation aids .................................................................................................................... 25 4.3.3 Description of the control elements ............................................................................................ 26

4.4 Remote access ..................................................................................................................39 4.4.1 General....................................................................................................................................... 40 4.4.2 Recommended browsers............................................................................................................ 40 4.4.3 Operating instructions ................................................................................................................ 41

5 Menu 44

5.1 Start screen ........................................................................................................................45 5.2 Quick setup ........................................................................................................................46

5.2.1 Quick setup: Project AS-i networks ............................................................................................ 47 5.2.2 Quick setup: Configure the operating mode of the AS-i masters ................................................ 48 5.2.3 Quick setup: Configure the output access .................................................................................. 49 5.2.4 Quick setup: Access the device via QR code ............................................................................. 49 5.2.5 Quick setup: Configure the EtherNet/IP interface ....................................................................... 50

3


Content

5.2.6 Quick setup: Set the configuration mode .................................................................................... 51 5.2.7 Quick setup: Set the configuration interface ............................................................................... 52 5.2.8 Quick setup: Address the AS-i slaves connected to AS-i master 1 ............................................ 54 5.2.9 Quick setup: Address the AS-i slaves connected to AS-i master 2 ............................................ 55

5.3 AS-i 1 / AS-i 2 .....................................................................................................................56 5.3.1 AS-i 1 / AS-i 2: Master setup ...................................................................................................... 57 5.3.2 AS-i 1 / AS-i 2: Diagnosis ........................................................................................................... 59 5.3.3 AS-i 1 / AS-i 2: AS-i slaves ......................................................................................................... 61

5.4 System ...............................................................................................................................67 5.4.1 System: Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) .......................................................................... 68 5.4.2 System: Information ................................................................................................................... 74 5.4.3 System: Setup ............................................................................................................................ 75 5.4.4 System: Diagnosis ...................................................................................................................... 87

5.5 Interfaces ...........................................................................................................................88 5.5.1 Interfaces: Configuration interface .............................................................................................. 89 5.5.2 Interfaces: EtherNet/IP interface ................................................................................................ 92

5.6 ifm system solutions .........................................................................................................104 5.6.1 Notes on ifm system solutions .................................................................................................. 105 5.6.2 Show information about installed ifm apps ............................................................................... 106 5.6.3 Install single/basic app ............................................................................................................. 107 5.6.4 Install multi app ........................................................................................................................ 108 5.6.5 Update ifm apps ....................................................................................................................... 109 5.6.6 Uninstall ifm apps ..................................................................................................................... 109

6 Setup 110

6.1 Connect the device ..........................................................................................................111 6.1.1 EtherNet/IP interface ................................................................................................................ 111 6.1.2 Configuration interface ............................................................................................................. 111

6.2 Start screen 'Basic settings' .............................................................................................111 6.2.1 Change the basic settings of the device ................................................................................... 112

6.3 Update the firmware of the device ...................................................................................114 6.3.1 Behaviour of the settings upon firmware update ...................................................................... 114 6.3.2 Firmware update from SD card ................................................................................................ 115 6.3.3 Firmware update via the web interface ..................................................................................... 116

6.4 Connect and address AS-i slaves ....................................................................................118 6.5 Setup of EtherNet/IP ........................................................................................................118 6.6 Setup of the configuration interface .................................................................................118 6.7 Exchange AS-i slave ........................................................................................................119

7 Troubleshooting 120

7.1 Status LED .......................................................................................................................121 7.1.1 Status LED: Basic device ......................................................................................................... 121 7.1.2 Status LED: fieldbus EtherNet/IP ............................................................................................. 121

7.2 Online diagnosis function .................................................................................................122 7.2.1 Message types ......................................................................................................................... 122 7.2.2 Locate error sources ................................................................................................................ 122

7.3 Online Support Center (OSC) ..........................................................................................123 7.3.1 OSC: View current error messages .......................................................................................... 124 7.3.2 OSC: Show message history .................................................................................................... 125

8 Appendix 126

8.1 Approval tests / certifications ...........................................................................................127 8.2 Technical data ..................................................................................................................128

8.2.1 Housing .................................................................................................................................... 129 8.2.2 Display elements ...................................................................................................................... 129 8.2.3 Operation .................................................................................................................................. 129 8.2.4 Power supply connections ........................................................................................................ 129 8.2.5 Interfaces .................................................................................................................................. 130

4


Content

8.2.6 Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) ..................................................................................... 131 8.3 Address assignment in Ethernet networks ......................................................................132 8.4 Configuration interface: connection concepts ..................................................................133

8.4.1 Direct link .................................................................................................................................. 134 8.4.2 Connection via Ethernet network .............................................................................................. 135

8.5 AS-i master ......................................................................................................................136 8.5.1 Operating modes of the AS-i master ........................................................................................ 137 8.5.2 Master flags .............................................................................................................................. 139

8.6 AS-i slaves .......................................................................................................................144 8.6.1 Profiles of AS-i slaves............................................................................................................... 145

8.7 Fieldbus EtherNet/IP ........................................................................................................155 8.7.1 Fieldbus objects ....................................................................................................................... 156 8.7.2 Fieldbus parameters ................................................................................................................. 158 8.7.3 Device-specific parameters ...................................................................................................... 159 8.7.4 Cyclic data ................................................................................................................................ 181 8.7.5 Acyclic data .............................................................................................................................. 217 8.7.6 Configuration mode .................................................................................................................. 335

8.8 OSC messages ................................................................................................................345 8.8.1 OSC messages: System .......................................................................................................... 346 8.8.2 OSC messages: AS-i 1 / AS-i 2 ................................................................................................ 347

8.9 Information on AS-i ..........................................................................................................348

9 Glossary of Terms 349

10 Index 360

11 ifm weltweit • ifm worldwide • ifm à l’échelle internationale 365

5


Preliminary note Legal and copyright information

1 Preliminary note

Legal and copyright information ............................................................................................................... 6 Purpose of the document ......................................................................................................................... 6 Symbols and formats used ....................................................................................................................... 7 Overview: User documentation for AC14 ................................................................................................. 8 Getting started .......................................................................................................................................... 8 Modification history ................................................................................................................................... 9

6919

6


Preliminary note Legal and copyright information

>

1.1 Legal and copyright information 6088

© All rights reserved by ifm electronic gmbh. No part of this manual may be reproduced and used without the consent of ifm electronic gmbh.

All product names, pictures, companies or other brands used on our pages are the property of the respective rights owners: • AS-i is the property of the AS-International Association, (→ www.as-interface.net) • CAN is the property of the CiA (CAN in Automation e.V.), Germany (→ www.can-cia.org) • CODESYS™ is the property of the 3S – Smart Software Solutions GmbH, Germany (→ www.codesys.com) • DeviceNet™ is the property of the ODVA™ (Open DeviceNet Vendor Association), USA (→ www.odva.org) • EtherNet/IP® is the property of the →ODVA™ • IO-Link® (→ www.io-link.com) is the property of the →PROFIBUS Nutzerorganisation e.V., Germany • Microsoft® is the property of the Microsoft Corporation, USA (→ www.microsoft.com) • PROFIBUS® is the property of the PROFIBUS Nutzerorganisation e.V., Germany (→ www.profibus.com) • PROFINET® is the property of the →PROFIBUS Nutzerorganisation e.V., Germany • Windows® is the property of the →Microsoft Corporation, USA

>

1.2 Purpose of the document 12104

This document applies to devices of the type "Smart PLC AC14 with EtherNet/IP interface" (art. no.: AC1421/AC1422) as from firmware version 3.1.2.

These instructions describe the following topics:

Operation and configuration of the device via the menu (GUI and web interface)

Command channels, cyclic and acyclic data records

Fault diagnostics and troubleshooting

http://www.as-interface.net/

http://www.can-cia.org/

http://www.codesys.com/

http://www.odva.org/

http://www.io-link.com/

http://www.microsoft.com/

http://www.profibus.com/

7


Preliminary note Symbols and formats used

>

1.3 Symbols and formats used 15989

WARNING

Death or serious irreversible injuries may result.

CAUTION

Slight reversible injuries may result.

NOTICE

Property damage is to be expected or may result.

Important note Non-compliance can result in malfunction or interference

Information Supplementary note

► ... Request for action

> ... Reaction, result

→ ... "see"

abc Cross-reference

123 0x123 0b010

Decimal number Hexadecimal number Binary number

[...] Designation of pushbuttons, buttons or indications

8


Preliminary note Overview: User documentation for AC14

>

1.4 Overview: User documentation for AC14 6998

ifm electronic provides the following user documentation for the models of the device class "Smart PLC AC14":

Document Content / description

Data sheet Technical data of AC142n as a table

Operating instructions * Notes on mounting and electrical installation of AC142n

Setup, description of the operating and display elements, maintenance information, scale drawing

Device manual Notes on operation of AC142n via GUI and web interface

Description of the cyclic and acyclic data records, fieldbus parameters and command interface

Fault description

Programming manual Notes on configuration of a AC142n system in CODESYS

Notes on programming of the PLC of AC142n

Description of the device-specific CODESYS function libraries

Legend: *... The operating instructions are supplied with the device.

All documents can be downloaded from ifm's website. → www.ifm.com > Select country > [Data sheet search] > (Article no.) > [Operating instructions]

>

1.5 Getting started 6922

Mounting instructions and notes on the electrical installation of the device can be found in the supplied operating instructions. If you misplace your instructions, you can download them from the ifm website: → www.ifm.com > Select country > [Data sheet search] > (Article no.) > [Operating instructions]

Familiarise yourself with the graphical user interface (→ Operation (→ page 19))!

The menu functions of the graphical user interface are described in the chapter → Menu (→ page 44).

For information regarding the setup of the device following installation and electrical connection please refer to chapter → Setup (→ page 110).

For information about the programming of the device-internal PLC with CODESYS, please refer to the programming manual: → www.ifm.com > Select country > [Data sheet search] > (Article no.) > [Operating instructions]

http://www.ifm.com/

http://www.ifm.com/

http://www.ifm.com/

9


Preliminary note Modification history

>

1.6 Modification history 7080

Version Topic Date

1.0 New creation of the document 24/10/2014

2.0 New functions provided by firmware 3.1.2

ifm system solutions

Diagnostic protocol

Access to OSC from the start screen

Description of cyclic fieldbus data

Description of acyclic fieldbus data (command interface)

30/11/2015

10


Safety instructions Modification history

2 Safety instructions

Required background knowledge ...........................................................................................................11 Please note! ............................................................................................................................................11 Tampering with the unit ..........................................................................................................................12 Start-up behaviour of the controller ........................................................................................................12

213

11


Safety instructions Required background knowledge

>

2.1 Required background knowledge 13323

This document is intended for people with knowledge of control technology and PLC programming with IEC 61131-3.

To program the PLC, the people should also be familiar with the CODESYS software.

This document is intended for specialists. Specialists are people who, based on their relevant training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards that may be caused during operation or maintenance of the product. The document contains information about the correct handling of the product.

► Read this document before use to familiarise yourself with operating conditions, installation and operation. Keep this document during the entire duration of use of the device.

► Follow the safety instructions. >

2.2 Please note! 6091

11212

No characteristics are warranted with the information, notes and examples provided in this manual. With the drawings, representations and examples given no responsibility for the system is assumed and no application-specific particularities are taken into account.

► The manufacturer of the machine/equipment is responsible for ensuring the safety of the machine/equipment.

► Follow the national and international regulations of the country in which the machine/installation is to be placed on the market!

WARNING

Non-observance of these instructions can lead to property damage or personal injury! ifm electronic gmbh does not assume any liability in this regard.

► The acting person must have read and understood the safety instructions and the corresponding chapters in this manual before working on and with this device.

► The acting person must be authorised to work on the machine/equipment.

► The acting person must have the qualifications and training required to perform this work.

► Adhere to the technical data of the devices! You can find the current data sheet on ifm's homepage at: → www.ifm.com > Select your country > [Data sheet search] > (article number.) > [Technical data in PDF format]

► Note the installation and wiring information as well as the functions and features of the devices! → supplied installation instructions or on ifm's homepage: → www.ifm.com > Select your country > [Data sheet search] > (article number.) > [Operating instructions]

► Please note the corrections and notes in the release notes for the existing documentation, available on the ifm website: → www.ifm.com > Select your country > [Data sheet search] > (article number.) > [Operating instructions]

http://www.ifm.com/

http://www.ifm.com/

http://www.ifm.com/

12


Safety instructions Tampering with the unit

>

2.3 Tampering with the unit 11242

WARNING

Tampering with the units can affect the safety of operators and machinery!

Tampering with the units is not allowed. In case of non-compliance our liability and warranty expire.

► Do not open the devices!

► Do not insert any objects into the devices!

► Prevent metal foreign bodies from penetrating!

>

2.4 Start-up behaviour of the controller 6827

15233 11575

WARNING

Danger due to unintentional and dangerous start of machine or plant sections!

► When creating the program, the programmer must ensure that no unintentional and dangerous start of machines or plant sections after a fault (e.g. e-stop) and the following fault elimination can occur! Realise restart inhibit!

► In case of an error, set the outputs concerned to FALSE in the program!

A restart can, for example, be caused by: • voltage restoration after power failure • reset after watchdog response because of too long a cycle time • error elimination after an E-stop

To ensure a safe behaviour of the controller:

► monitor the voltage supply in the application program.

► In case of an error switch off all relevant outputs in the application program.

► Monitor actuators which can cause hazardous movements in the application program (feedback).

► Monitor relay contacts which can cause hazardous movements in the application program (feedback).

► If necessary, ensure that welded relay contacts in the application project cannot trigger or continue hazardous movements.

13


System description Start-up behaviour of the controller

3 System description

Intended use ...........................................................................................................................................14 Information concerning the device .........................................................................................................15

975

14


System description Intended use

>

3.1 Intended use 5310

NOTICE

Danger when device is overloaded or incorrectly used.

The device and / or the associated machine / plant may be damaged or destroyed or may malfunction if the limits of the "Technical data" for this device are exceeded or if the device is used outside the specified "Intended use".

► Use the device only within the limits of the Technical data (→ page 128) ( data sheet).

► Use the device only in accordance with the "Intended use".

>

3.1.1 Permitted use 12109

You may use the device for the following purposes (= intended use):

as a gateway between the AS-i network and a higher-level controller (EtherNet/IP controller = host; e.g. PLC) via the fieldbus interface EtherNet/IP.

as Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) for program-based parameter setting and control of the AS-i slaves connected to the device.

The device provides the following features:

The SmartPLC with EtherNet/IP interface integrates the following components: – AC1421: 1 AS-i master – AC1422: 2 AS-i masters – a Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) – a web server – a EtherNet/IP interface with 2-port switch – an EtherNet configuration interface

It controls the exchange of data to the sensor/actuator level.

It communicates with the superior control level via EtherNet/IP.

It visualises sensor/actuator data on the integrated web server.

It allows the configuration of the device via the web server. >

3.1.2 Prohibited use 5320

In the following areas you must NOT use the device:

outdoors,

in wet environments,

beyond the limits of the technical data ( data sheet).

15


System description Information concerning the device

>

3.2 Information concerning the device

Where is what on the AS-i device? ........................................................................................................16 Operating elements ................................................................................................................................17 Display elements ....................................................................................................................................17 CODESYS PLC ......................................................................................................................................17 Interfaces ................................................................................................................................................18 Required accessories .............................................................................................................................18

5330

16



>

3.2.1 Where is what on the AS-i device? 12112

Legend:

Display

Status LED (H1)

2 function keys

4 arrow keys

Connector (X1) for AS-i 1, AS-i 2, functional earth

Connector (X2) for AUX (here with AUX jumper)

Front flap

Slot for SD card (behind the front flap)

EtherNet configuration interface (X3) (behind the front flap)

EtherNet/IP interface 2 (X6) with status LED (H2, H3)

EtherNet/IP interface 1 (X7) with status LED (H4, H5)

17



>

3.2.2 Operating elements 15840

The device provides the following operating elements. >

Arrow and function keys 15867

Below the display is the key panel with two function keys and four arrow keys. The operator controls the Graphical User Interface (GUI) of the device with the keys.

Technical data: → Operation (→ page 129) >

3.2.3 Display elements 7062

The device provides the following display elements: >

Display 7083

The display is used to display the Graphical User Interface (GUI) of the device.

Operating notes: → Operation (→ page 19)

Technical data: → Display elements (→ page 129) >

Status LEDs 18985

The device features the following status LEDs which display the current status of system components.

Meaning of the LED colours and flashing frequencies: → Status LED (→ page 121) >

3.2.4 CODESYS PLC 7095

The device features a Programmable Logic Controller (PLC). The PLC can run applications (apps) that have been created with the IEC 61131-3 compliant programming software "CODESYS Development System" (from version 3.5 SP4 patch 2).

Technical data: → Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) (→ page 131)


http://www.ifm.com/

18



>

3.2.5 Interfaces 15839

The device provides the following interfaces: >

Ethernet configuration interface 6982

The configuration interface (X3) is located behind the front flap of the device. It allows the user to access the following device functions:

web interface for device configuration and diagnosis

programming of the device-internal PLC using CODESYS

Configuration as fieldbus interface

Possible network topologies: → Configuration interface: connection concepts (→ page 133)

Technical data: → Interfaces (→ page 130) >

EtherNet/IP fieldbus interface 12113

The device communicates with the higher-level control instance of the EtherNet/IP network via the EtherNet/IP interface (X6/X7).

Notes regarding connetion concepts: → Configuration interface: connection concepts (→ page 133)


SD card slot 9135

The SD card slot (X5) is located behind the front flap of the device. The following actions can be performed with an SD card:

update the firmware of the device

save/restore the device configuration


3.2.6 Required accessories 6926

To be able to operate the device in a sensible way you need the following accessories (not supplied with the device):

Depending on the selected voltage supply ( Operating instructions) you need:

a power supply for the 24 V power supply (e.g. art. no. DN3011)

for each AS-i master one AS-i power supply each (e.g. art. no. AC1236)

a data decoupling module AC1250 (accessory, optional)

AS-i slaves.

19


Operation Information concerning the device

4 Operation

Control of the graphical user interface ...................................................................................................20 Menu view...............................................................................................................................................22 Page view ...............................................................................................................................................25 Remote access .......................................................................................................................................39

14805

20


Operation Control of the graphical user interface

>

4.1 Control of the graphical user interface 6930

Below the display is the key panel with six membrane keys. The operator controls the graphical user interface of the device with these keys. The key panel is closely linked to the navigation status bar.

Legend:

Label left function key

Navigation compass

Label right function key

Right function key

Left function key

Arrow key []

Arrow key []

Arrow key []

Arrow key []

21


Operation Control of the graphical user interface

>

4.1.1 Function keys 7090

The two function keys allow the operator to trigger specified actions (e.g. tick a checkbox). The function of the function keys changes depending on the context.

The two text fields in the navigation status bar are associated with the function keys located directly below the display. They indicate the action that will be triggered if the function key is pressed in the current work step. If the function key is not labelled, it means that it has no function in the present situation.

Example (→ figure):

► The left function key triggers the action [Select].

► The right function key triggers the action [Back].

>

4.1.2 Arrow keys 7091

The fourarrow keys [],[], [] and [] can be used for navigation and selection.

The navigation compass shows which of the four arrow keys can be used in the respective work step.

Examples:

All arrow keys are active and will trigger a device response when pressed.

Only the arrow keys [] and [] are active and will trigger a device response when pressed.

22


Operation Menu view

>

4.2 Menu view 6996

The menu view allows the user to select the menu page with the required control or display function.

Legend:

Info bar

Main navigation bar

Subnavigation bar 1

Subnavigation bar 2

Selected menu item (focus)

Navigation status bar with - labelling of the function keys - navigation compass

Long texts are displayed as scrolling text in the info bar.

>

4.2.1 Menu navigation 10967

The central operating elements in the menu view are the three navigation bars. They reflect the menu structure of the device software. Each navigation bar represents a menu level. The symbols in a navigation bar represent the submenus and menu items.

Rules for menu navigation:

► Use []/[] to navigate within a menu level.

> The selected symbol has the focus (= orange frame).

> If the selected symbol has a submenu, the corresponding subnavigation bar will automatically appear.

► Use [] to go one menu level down.

► Use [] to go one menu level up.

At the lowest menu level:

► Press [Select] function key to go to the page of the selected menu item (→ Page view (→ page 25)).

In the main navigation bar:

► Press [Back] function key to return to the start screen (→ Start screen (→ page 45)).

23


Operation Menu view

>

4.2.2 Navigation aids 15830

The following screen elements help you navigate through the menu:

> The info bar shows the navigation path of the selected menu symbol.

> The navigation compass shows which navigation steps are possible from the current position.

Legend:

Info bar

Navigation path to the focused menu element: [System] > [PLC] > [Setup]

Menu element with focus

Navigation path to the focused menu element:

> >

24


Operation Menu view

>

Example 11770

To access the menu page containing the setting options for the device-internal PLC:

1. > Initial position when accessing the menu screen

2. ► Use [] to select the [System] menu symbol.

> The focus is on the [System] menu symbol.

> The first subnavigation bar appears.

3. ► Use [] to change to the first subnavigation barh.

> The focus is on the [Diagnosis] menu symbol.

4. ► Use [] to select the [PLC] menu symbol.

> The focus is on the [PLC] menu symbol.

> The second subnavigation bar appears.

5. ► Use [] to change to the second subnavigation bar.

> The focus is on the [Information] menu symbol.

6. ► Use [] to select the [Setup] menu symbol.

> The focus is on the [Setup] menu symbol.

► Press the [Select] function key to go to the page view of the [Setup] menu item.

> The page shows the setting options for the device-internal PLC.

25


Operation Page view

>

4.3 Page view 7959

The page view allows the user to select and execute a requested function.

Legend:

Info bar

Main navigation bar

Page

Scroll bar

Tab menu

Page element with focus

Navigation status bar with - labelling of function keys - navigation compass

>

4.3.1 Navigate on a page 15831

The page contains elements, that allow the operator to control the device or access information.

For page navigation, the following basic rules apply:

► Use the arrow keys []/[] to change between the different page elements.

> The selected element is marked (= orange frame).

► Use the [Back] function key to return to the tab menu / menu view.

Rules for using the different control elements: → Description of the control elements (→ page 26)

>

4.3.2 Use navigation aids 14838

The following aids offer navigation users additional orientation:

> The info bar shows detailed information about the selected element (focus).

Long texts are displayed as scrolling text in the info bar.

> The active menu symbol in the main navigation bar has a dark background.

> A scroll bar appears on the right side of the screen if the elements do not fit on the page.

> The navigation compass shows the navigation options in the active work step.

> The text fields in the navigation status bar show the current assignment of the function keys.

26


Operation Page view

>

4.3.3 Description of the control elements

Tab menu/Tab ........................................................................................................................................27 Button .....................................................................................................................................................28 Checkbox ................................................................................................................................................28 List ..........................................................................................................................................................29 Slave selector .........................................................................................................................................30 Confirmation message ............................................................................................................................35 Numerical field ........................................................................................................................................36 Binary field ..............................................................................................................................................38

7013

A page consists of different control elements.

27


Operation Page view

>

Tab menu/Tab 8737

A tab menu groups together the different functions of a menu page. A tab menu consists of at least two tabs. A tab combines related functions.

Example:

> The focused tab has an orange background

> The info bar displays the name of the active tab (in this example: Errors / slave).

> The symbols and indicate that there are more tabs on the left and right sides of the visible tab.

> The page shows the control elements that belong to the currently selected tab.

Tabs can have the following background colours:

= Tab has the focus

= Tab is active

= Tab is inactive

Use:

1 Select the menu item

► Go to the menu item with the tab menu.

> The tab menu appears.

> The focus is on the left-hand tab.

2 Select a tab

► Use [] / [] arrow key to select the desired tab.

> The focus (orange background) moves to the selected tab:

> The page shows the functions of the selected tab.

3 Activate the menu page

► Press [Select] function key to go to the page that belongs to the active tab.

> When going to the page, the tab menu remains visible.

> The background colour of the active tab turns grey.

4 Carry out the desired functions

► Use [] to select and execute the desired function.

5 Change to tab menu

► Press [Back] function key to change to the tab menu.

> The focus (orange background) moves to the active tab.

28


Operation Page view

>

Button 14196

A button allows the operator to carry out a specified action once. The caption on the button describes the action.

Example:

Use:

1 Select a button

► Use the arrow keys [] / [] to select a button.

> The selected button gets an orange frame:

2 Activate the button

► Use [Select] function key to activate the selected button.

> The function is executed. >

Checkbox 7038

A checkbox permits the user to activate/deactivate a parameter. A checkbox control element consists of a checkbox and a caption.

Example:

Use:

1 Select a checkbox

► Use arrow key [] / [] to select the checkbox

> The focus (orange frame) moves to the selected checkbox

OR:

2 Check/uncheck a checkbox

► Use function key [Select] to check/uncheck the selected checkbox.

> The status change is indicated:

= checkbox is checked OR:

= checkbox is unchecked

The setting or clearing of a checkbox is not always immediately effective. Often the change must be confirmed by clicking a button (e.g. [Accept selection])!

29


Operation Page view

>

List 7042

A list provides a set of defined values. The operator can select precisely one value from this set (= 1 of n selection).

Examples:

= list without caption

= list with caption

Use:

1 Select a list

► Use arrow key [] / [] to select the list.

> The focus (orange frame) moves to the selected list.

> The list shows the active value: (in this exampleGateway).

2 Activate the list

► Use function key [Select] to open the list.

> The opened list shows the selectable values.

3 Select a value

► Use arrow key [] / [] to select the desired value from the list.

> The background colour of the selected value turns orange.

4 Apply the selected value

► Use function key [Select] to apply the selected value. OR: Use function key [Back] to quit and close the list.

> The list shows the selected value.

The set value will not always become effective immediately. Often the change must be confirmed by clicking a button (e.g. [Accept selection])!

30


Operation Page view

>

Slave selector

Overview of slave states .........................................................................................................................31 Overview of free slave addresses ..........................................................................................................33

7018

The slave selector is used to select an AS-i slave or an AS-i address.

Legend:

Indicator of AS-i master operating mode

AS-i address symbol

Highlighted AS-i address (focus)

Status message of highlighted AS-i address

> The status LED indicates the active operating mode of the AS-i master: = AS-i master in protected mode = AS-i master in projection mode

> Every field represents an AS-i address. An AS-i address can be occupied by: – a single slave symbol – an A/B slave pair symbol

> The row and column headers help to locate the AS-i address. Example: address of the field selected in the picture – row header: 1x (= tens digit of the AS-i address)

– column header: 8 (= units digit of the AS-i address)

– type of slave: single slave (= symbol fully occupies the address field) – resulting AS-i address: 18

> The symbol of the A/B slave pair appears when an A or B slave is used on this address.

The slave selector is used in the following overviews:

Overview of slave states (→ Overview of slave states (→ page 31))

Overview of free slave addresses (→ Overview of free slave addresses (→ page 33))

31


Operation Page view

>

Overview of slave states 6992

> The slave selector shows an overview of the slaves in the selected AS-i network.

> The symbol colour signals the slave status. Meaning of symbols and colours: → Slave status: colour code + symbols (→ page 31)

> The text field displays the status of the selected AS-i slave. Possible status messages: - Slave active

- Not projected (= configuration error)

- Double address (= double address error)

- Periphery (= periphery fault)

Use:

1 Select an AS-i slave

► Use the arrow keys [], [], [] and [] to select the desired AS-i slave.

> The focus (= orange frame) is on the selected AS-i slave.

> The info bar shows the address of the selected AS-i slave.

> The text field shows a status message about the selected AS-i slave.

2 Activate the selected AS-i slave

► Use function key [Select] to activate the selected AS-i slave and go to the next menu page. OR: Use function key [Back] to cancel and leave the slave selector.

>

Slave status: colour code + symbols 11236

Single slave A/B slave Colour Meaning

grey No slave found: slave address is neither in the LPS nor in the LDS

green Slave is activated ( in LAS)

red Configuration error type 1: – slave is projected (in LPS) but was not found (in LDS)

yellow Slave signals a peripheral fault

pink Several slaves have the same address (double address error)

grey red Configuration error type 2: – the found slave (in LDS) is not projected (in LPS) – the found slave has another profile than projected

32


Operation Page view

>

Meaning of the colour combinations (example: configuration error type 2) 11237

Symbol Colour Meaning

grey red grey

Configuration error type 2: – Single slave is projected (in LPS) but was not found (in LDS). – Instead, a new A slave with the same address was installed.

grey grey red

Configuration error type 2: – Single slave is projected (in LPS) but was not found (in LDS). – Instead, a new B slave with the same address was installed.

grey red Configuration error type 2: – A or B slave is projected (in LPS) but was not found (in LDS). – Instead, a new single slave with the same address was installed.

33


Operation Page view

>

Overview of free slave addresses 6993

In this overview, the slave selector shows the free and occupied AS-i addresses.

> The symbol colour indicates the state of the AS-i address. Meaning of symbols and colours: → Free slave addresses: colour code + symbols (→ page 33)

> The text field displays the status of the selected AS-i slave. Possible status messages: - Free

- Missing slave

Use:

1 Select the AS-i address

► Use the arrow keys [], [], [] and [] to select the desired AS-i address.

> The focus (= orange frame) is on the selected AS-i address.

> The info bar displays the selected AS-i address.

> The text field shows a status message for the selected AS-i address.

2 Activate the selected AS-i address

► Use [Select] function key to activate the selected AS-i address and go to the next menu page. OR: Use [Back] function key to cancel and leave the slave selector.

>

Free slave addresses: colour code + symbols 11239

Single slave A/B slave Colour Meaning Prio.

grey Slave address is already used. --

turquoise Address is free according to LDS (= no slave found), however: address already belongs to a stored projection (= application profile).

1

blue Address is free according to LDS (= no slave found). Address is not used in a stored projection (= application profile).

2

34


Operation Page view

>

Meaning of the colour combinations 11240

Symbol Colour Meaning

blue blue

Slave to be addressed is an A/B slave: A and B addresses are free.

blue grey

Slave to be addressed is an A/B slave: – A address is free. – B address is used.

grey blue

Slave to be addressed is an A/B slave: – Address is used. – B address is free.

turquoise turquoise

Slave to be addressed is an A/B slave: A and B addresses are free, but already used in a stored projection.

turquoise grey

Slave to be addressed is an A/B slave: – Address is free, but already used in a stored projection. – B address is used.

grey turquoise

Slave to be addressed is an A/B slave: – Address is used. – Address is free, but already used in a stored projection.

turquoise blue

Slave to be addressed is an A/B slave: – Address is free, but already used in a stored projection. – B address is free.

blue turquoise

Slave to be addressed is an A/B slave: – A address is free – Address is free, but already used in a stored projection.

35


Operation Page view

>

Confirmation message 7033

The confirmation message is a security prompt. It appears when important changes are made to the system settings. The confirmation message shows the changes made. For the changes to become effective, they first need to be acknowledged by the operator.

Example:

> Action: Change AS-i slave address from 1a to 1b

> Confirmation message shows: – Action (= Change AS-i address)

– Slave address prior to change – Slave address after change

> The operator has the following input options: – function key [Select] – function key [Back]

Use:

1 Change the settings

► Change the system settings.

> The confirmation message appears.

2 Confirm the message

► Use function key [Select] to confirm the changes and apply the new value. OR: Use function key [Back] to reject the changes and continue to use the old value.

> The page displays the valid settings.

36


Operation Page view

>

Numerical field 7046

The numerical field allows the operator to enter integer values. The value range is context-specific. Numerical fields are part of the following GUI elements:

Control element Example Meaning

IP address

Entry of an IP address (IPv4) in [w.x.y.z] format – w | x | y | z = network segments (value range: 0... 255)

Date

Date entry in [yyyy-mm-ss] format – yyyy = year (value range: 0000 ... 9999) – mm = month (value range: 01 ... 12) – dd = day (value range: 01 ... 31)

Time

Time entry in [hh:mm:ss] format – hh = hours (value range: 00 ... 12) – mm = minutes (value range: 00 .... 59) – ss = seconds (value range: 00 ... 59)

The numerical field for seconds (ss) cannot be edited!

Analogue value

Entry of an analogue output value Value range (per numerical field): 0 ... 9

Use (using the example of the numerical date field):

1 Select a numerical field

► Use arrow key [] / [] to select the date control element.

> The focus (= orange frame) is on the selected date control element.

> The date control element displays the current date

2 Activate the editing mode

► Press function key [Select] to enter the editing mode.

> The focus (orange frame) is on the right element

3 Set the desired value

► Use arrow key [] / [] to increment the desired value.

> The segment displays the new value.

Press and hold the arrow key [] / [] to rapidly move through larger value ranges.

4 Select the next segment

► Use the arrow key [] / [] to mark the segment to be edited.

> The focus (orange frame) moves to the marked segment

► Optional: Repeat steps 3 and 4 until all segments have the desired values.

37


Operation Page view

5 Adopt the set values

► Use [Select] function key to confirm the set values and to leave the edit mode. OR: Use [Back] function key to reset the set values and to leave the edit mode.

> The date control element displays the valid date

The set value will not always become effective immediately. Often the change must be confirmed by clicking a button (e.g. [Accept selection])!

38


Operation Page view

>

Binary field 7047

The binary field allows the operator to change a digital value bit-wise.

Example:

> Display of the 4-bit digital value:

Binary representation

= bit is on (= 1).

= bit is off (= 0).

Hexadecimal representation: 0xf = 1111

Use:

1 Select the binary field

► Use [] / [] arrow keyt o select the binary field.

> The focus (orange frame) is on the selected binary field.

> The control element shows the current value (digital and hexadecimal).

2 Activate the editing mode

► Press [Select] function key to enter the editing mode.

> The focus (orange frame) is on the right element.

3 Set the desired value

► Use [] / [] arrow key to set the desired value.

> The control element shows the new value in digital and hexadecimal format.

4 Select the next segment

► Use [] / [] arrow key to mark the segment to be edited.

> The focus (orange frame) is on the selected segment.

► Optional: Repeat steps 3 and 4 until all segments have the desired values.

5 Apply the set values

► Use [Select] function key to confirm the set values and to leave the edit mode. OR: Use [Back] function key to reset the set values and to leave the edit mode.

> The binary field displays the current value (binary and hexadecimal).

39


Operation Remote access

>

4.4 Remote access

General ...................................................................................................................................................40 Recommended browsers ........................................................................................................................40 Operating instructions .............................................................................................................................41

7068

The device has an integrated web server. It generates a web interface which allows remote access to all device functions via an web browser. The web-interface allows the operator to easily configure, parameterise and monitor the device in permanent operation via an ethernet-based network.

40



>

4.4.1 General 7069

The operating concept of the web interface follows the same philosophy as the operating concept of the local display. The web interface uses the same menu items, the same menu structure and the same symbols as the graphic user interface of the local display. >

Additional functions 14181

The web interface provides the following extra features compared to the user interface of the display:

Download Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) (→ Download the device and I/O description (→ page 95))

Download I/O description (→ Download the device and I/O description (→ page 95))

Adopt date and time settings of the PC/laptop (→ Adopt the system time of the PC (→ page 83))

Save diagnostics protocol (→ Store diagnostic protocol (→ page 86))

Use ifm system solutions (→ ifm-Systemlösungen (→ page 104))

>

4.4.2 Recommended browsers 7070

Use one of the following Internet browsers to correctly display the HTML pages of the web interface:

Microsoft Internet Explorer (from version 8.0)

Mozilla Firefox (from version 3.5)

41



>

4.4.3 Operating instructions

Web interface: Access 10283

► PC / Laptop / mobile device: Start Internet browser.

► Internet browser: Enter IP address of the device in the address line (e.g. 192.168.82.2)

> Internet browser displays the start page of the web interface. >

Web interface: navigation 14193

In the web interface, the pointing device (e.g. mouse, touchpad) is used instead of the following key functions:

Navigation functions of the arrow keys [], [], [], []

Selecting functiions of the function keys [Select] and [Back]

Example:

To select > :

► Place the cursor on symbol [AS-i 1] in the main navigation bar.

> symbol [AS-i 1] has the focus.

> Subnavigation bar appears.

> Navigation trail shows actual position in the menu tree: AS-i 1

► Place the cursor on symbol [Diagnosis] in the subnavigation bar.

> symbol [Diagnosis] has the focus.

> Navigation trail shows actual position in the menu tree: AS-i 1 > Diagnosis

► Click on symbol [Diagnosis]

> Web browser shows menu page [Diagnosis]

42



>

Web interface: Password protection 14187

The web server has a basic password protection to prevent unwanted or unauthorised changes to the device settings via the web interface.

When the web interface is accessed, a status bar at the top shows if the user is logged in or logged out:

User is logged in: - Full access to device settings - Full access to diagnostics and information data

User is logged out: - No access to device settings - Access to diagnostics and information data

The password is: CAFE

The password protection cannot be deactivated!

The password cannot be changed!

>

Web interface login 14221

► Go to the web interface (→ Operating instructions (→ page 41)).

> At the top of the web interface, the status bar displays the following status message:

► Enter the fixed password in the [Password:] field.

► Click [Login] to log in to the web interface.

> The status bar displays the changed status:

> The operator has unlimited access to all menus and functions of the web interface.

The operator remains logged in if one of the following actions is carried out:

the web browser is closed and reopened

the PC/laptop is restarted

AC142n is restarted

To prevent unauthorised access to the device settings:

► Manually log off before you leave the web interface! (→ Disconnect from web interface (→ page 43))

► Remember to turn off the "Save password" function of your web browser before accessing the web interface!

► If the "Save password" function of your web browser is not turned off: delete the stored passwords in your browser settings!

43



>

Disconnect from web interface 14276

To log out of the web interface:

► Start web interface

> Status line with status message is displayed at the top of the web interface:

► Log out of the web interface by clicking [Logout]

> Status bar shows changed status

> User can only access menus in the web interface containing diagnostic and information data.

> An error message is displayed when a user in the web interface accesses a menu with device settings.

The user stays logged into the web interface even when the web browser is closed and then restarted.

To prevent unauthorised access to the device settings:

► After finishing the access via the web browser manually log out of the device web interface!

► When passwort memory function of the web browser is not deactivated: Delete all saved passwords in the browser settings!

44


Menu Remote access

5 Menu

Start screen ............................................................................................................................................45 Quick setup .............................................................................................................................................46 AS-i 1 / AS-i 2 .........................................................................................................................................56 System ....................................................................................................................................................67 Interfaces ................................................................................................................................................88 ifm system solutions .............................................................................................................................104

18788

This chapter describes the menu functions of the device’s graphical user interface.

45


Menu Start screen

>

5.1 Start screen 14439

When starting the device, the start screen of the graphical user interface appears (special case: system start after initial commissioning or firmware update: → Start screen 'Basic settings' (→ page 111)). The start screen displays the status information of important system components. Moreover, the graphical user interface is accessed and operated from the start screen.

AS-i master 1 operation mode

= Protected mode

= Projection mode

AS-i master 2 operation mode → AS-i master 1 operation mode only available for devices with 2 AS-i masters

Control instance of the AS-i slave outputs

= Manual | Manual with PLC

= Gateway | Gateway with PLC

= PLC

Status of the EtherNet/IP connection

=active

=inactive

► Press [Menu] function key to go to the menu (→ Menu functions (→ page 46))

OR:

► Press [OSC] function key to go to the Online Support Center (→ Online Support Center (OSC) (→ page 123))

46


Menu Quick setup

>

5.2 Quick setup 7273

The [Quick setup] menu provides fast access to the most important device functions.

Navigation path Functions

→ Quick setup: Project AS-i networks (→ page 47) → Quick setup: Configure the operating mode of the AS-i masters (→ page 48) → Quick setup: Configure the output access (→ page 49) → Quick setup: Access the device via QR code (→ page 49) → Quick setup: configure the EtherNet/IP interface (→ page 50) → Quick setup: Set the configuration mode (→ page 51) → Quick setup: Set the configuration interface (→ page 52) → Quick setup: Address the AS-i slaves connected to AS-i master 1 (→ page 54) → Quick setup: Address the AS-i slaves connected to AS-i master 2 (→ page 55)

47


Menu Quick setup

>

5.2.1 Quick setup: Project AS-i networks 8973

During projection adaptation, the AS-i master carries out the following actions:

The configuration data of all detected AS-i slaves (LDS) is saved

The detected AS-i slaves are added to the list of projected slaves (LPS)

To carry out the projection adaptation on AS-i master 1 and/or AS-i master 2:

1 Select the menu page

►

► Select [Project all] tab.

2 Select the AS-i master for projection adaptation

► Set the following parameters as required:

Parameter Meaning Possible values

[AS-i master 1] Select AS-i master 1 for projection adaptation

= Exclude AS-i master 1 from projection adaptation

= Include AS-i master 1 in projection adaptation

[AS-i master 2] Select AS-i master 2 for projection adaptation

(only available for devices with 2 AS-i masters)

= Exclude AS-i master 2 from projection adaptation

= Include AS-i master 2 in projection adaptation

3 Start the projection adaptation

► Press [Start projection process].

> The selected AS-i masters go into "projection mode".

> A projection adaptation is carried out on the selected AS-i masters.

> After the projection adaptation, the selected AS-i masters go into "protected mode".

48


Menu Quick setup

>

5.2.2 Quick setup: Configure the operating mode of the AS-i masters 8974

Information regarding the operating modes of an AS-i master:→ Operating modes of the AS-i master (→ page 137)

To configure the operating modes of the AS-i masters:


►

► Select [Operation modes] tab.

2 Configure the operating mode of AS-i master 1 and the behaviour of the connected AS-i slaves

> In group [AS-i master 1] , set the following parameters as required:


[Projection mode] Active operating mode of the AS-i master

= Projection mode inactive: AS-i network runs in protected mode (normal mode)

= Projection mode active: AS-i network can be projected. (→ Quick setup: Address the AS-i slaves connected to AS-i master 1 (→ page 54) or → Quick setup: Address the AS-i slaves connected to AS-i master 2 (→ page 55))

[No slave reset] Behaviour of the AS-i slaves when changing the operating mode

= Slave is reset when changing the operating mode: When changing the operating mode, the AS-i slaves will be reset for a short moment (reset or offline phase).

= Slave is not reset when changing the operating mode: When changing the operating mode, the AS-i slaves continue to operate without interruption.

> Selected values are applied.

3 Optional: set the operating mode of AS-i master 2 and the behaviour of the AS-i slaves

► Repeat step 2 for the group [AS-i master 2].

49


Menu Quick setup

>

5.2.3 Quick setup: Configure the output access 17867

Only one control instance at a time can have write access to the outputs of the connected AS-i slaves. The operator configures the control instance with the parameter [Output access].

To configure the control instance of the AS-i slave outputs:


►

► Select [Operation modes] tab.

2 Set the control instance for the outputs of the AS-i slaves

► From the list [Output access], select the desired value:


[Output access] Control instance of the AS-i slave outputs

Gateway = A higher-level PLC controls the outputs of the AS-i slaves.

Manual = The operator controls the outputs of the AS-i slaves via the graphical user interface.

PLC = The device-internal PLC controls the outputs of the AS-i slaves.

3 Save the changes

► Press [Accept selection] to save the changes.

> The selected instance controls the outputs of the AS-i slaves. >

5.2.4 Quick setup: Access the device via QR code 11764

The QR code (Quick Response Code) allows the operator to access the web interface of the device from a smartphone or tablet PC.

Requirements:

The AS-i device must be connected to a wireless LAN router with switch functionality. (→ Connection via Ethernet network (→ page 135))

The smartphone/tablet PC is connected to the wireless LAN router.

The smartphone/tablet PC provides a camera function.

The smartphone/tablet PC has a QR-code reader installed.

1 Select menu page

►

► Select the [QR-Code] tab.

> The display shows the QR code.

2 Read the QR code

► Start the QR code reading app and scan the QR code.

> The smartphone displays the web interface of the device (→ Remote access (→ page 39)).

50


Menu Quick setup

>

5.2.5 Quick setup: Configure the EtherNet/IP interface 12131

The device provides the following options for configuration of the EtherNet/IP interface:

Manual = The operator sets the interface parameters (IP address, network mask, gateway address) manually.

Automatic = The interface parameters are automatically set through one of the following protocols.

– Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) – Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP)

In order to obtain the interface parameters automatically via DHCP or BOOTP, the device must be connected to a DHCP or BOOTP server.

► Enable the DHCP/BOOTP server on the fieldbus controller.

► Connect the EtherNet/IP interface (X6/X7) to a DHCP/BOOTP server.

To configure the IP parameters of the EtherNet/IP interface:


►

► Select [EtherNet/IP] tab.

2 Display the current settings

> The parameters below show the active settings:


[IP mode] active configuration method Static = The operator sets the IP parameters manually.

DHCP = The interface receives the IP parameters from a DHCP server.

BOOTP = The interface receives the IP parameters from a BOOTP server.

[IP address] IP address of the interface e.g. 192.168.10.100

[Subnet mask] Network mask of the network segment

e.g. 255.255.255.0

[Gateway address] IP address of the network gateway

e.g. 192.168.10.1

► Select one of the following actions: – Configure the IP parameters manually: continue with → step 3 – Configure the IP parameters automatically: continue with → step 4

3 Configure the IP parameters manually

► From the list [IP mode], select the value Static.

► Set the following parameters as required: – [IP address] – [Subnet mask] – [Gateway address]

► Press [Accept] to save the changes.

► Continue with → step 5

51


Menu Quick setup

4 Configure the IP parameters automatically

► From the list [IP mode], select either DHCP or BOOTP.


> The device receives the IP parameters from a DHCP or BOOTP server.

The automatic configuration of the interface can take up to 10 seconds.

5 Display the current settings

> The parameters (→ step 2) show the active IP settings of the EtherNet/IP interface. >

5.2.6 Quick setup: Set the configuration mode 12236

The device can be configured in two different ways:

Top-down mode: The device-specific parameters and the module configuration are set via the projection software of the EtherNet/IP controller.

Independent mode: The parameters of the EtherNet/IP interface are set via the graphical user interface of the device.

More information: → Configuration mode (→ page 335)


►

► Select [EtherNet/IP] tab.

2 Set the configuration mode



[Configuration mode] Active configuration mode of the device

Top-Down = The device-specific parameters and the module configuration are set via the projection software of the EtherNet/IP controller.

Independent = The parameters of the EtherNet/IP interface are set via the graphical user interface of the device.

3 Save the changes


> The selected instance controls the outputs of the AS-i slaves.

52


Menu Quick setup

>

5.2.7 Quick setup: Set the configuration interface 8991

The device provides the following options for configuration of the EtherNet configuration interface:


Automatic = The interface parameters are set automatically. The operator can choose between these protocols:

– Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) – Zero Configuration Networking (Zeroconf)

The device must be connected to a DHCP server to automatically receive the interface parameters via DHCP.

► Connect the configuration interface (X3) to a DHCP server.

To configure the IP parameters of the configuration interface:


►

► Select [Configuration interface] tab.

2 Show the active settings



[Optain IP address autom.]

Active method for the configuration of the interface parameters

= Manual assignment of the interface parameters through the operator

= Automatic assignment of the interface parameters

[IP status] Configuration protocol used Static = The operator sets the IP parameters manually.

DHCP = The IP parameters are set by a DHCP server.

Zeroconf = The IP parameters are set automatically with the Zeroconf protocol.



e.g. 255.255.255.0


e.g. 192.168.0.1

► Take one of the following actions: – Configure the IP parameters manually: continue with → step 3 – Configure the IP parameters automatically: continue with → step 4

3 Configure the IP parameters manually

► Uncheck [Optain IP address autom.].

► Set the following parameters as required: – [IP address]

53


Menu Quick setup

– [Subnet mask] – [Gateway address]



4 Configure the IP parameters automatically

► Check [Optain IP address autom.].


> The device tries to obtain IP parameters from a DHCP server.

> If the IP parameter configuration via DHCP server fails, the device will generate the IP parameters by means of the Zeroconf protocol.

The automatic configuration of the interface takes approx. 10 seconds.

5 Show the current settings

> The parameters (→ step 2) show the active IP settings of the configuration interface.

54


Menu Quick setup

>

5.2.8 Quick setup: Address the AS-i slaves connected to AS-i master 1 8992

To change the address of an AS-i slave connected to AS-i master 1:


►

► Select [Addressing AS-i 1] tab.

2 Select the AS-i slave

> The page provides an overview of the current addressing and status of the AS-i slaves on the selected AS-i master (→ figure) Notes on colour codes: → Overview of slave states (→ page 31)

► Select the AS-i slave of which want to change the address.

► Use [Select] to activate the selected AS-i slave.

3 Select a new AS-i address

> The page provides an overview of the free AS-i addresses (→ figure) Notes on colour codes: → Overview of free slave addresses (→ page 33)

► Select the address to be assigned to the AS-i slave.

► Assign the selected address with [Select].

> The confirmation prompt appears.

► Confirm the message with [OK].

> The AS-i slave has new address.

> The page provides an overview of the current addressing and configuration errors (→ figure)

4 Address additional AS-i slaves (optional)

► Repeat steps 2 and 3 to address additional AS-i slaves.

After the address change, the present configuration no longer corresponds to the stored configuration.

> The slave status indicates a configuration error.

To eliminate the configuration error:

► Start a projection adaptation (→ Quick setup: Project AS-i networks (→ page 47)).

55


Menu Quick setup

>

5.2.9 Quick setup: Address the AS-i slaves connected to AS-i master 2 11671

To change the address of an AS-i slave connected to AS-i master 2


►

► Select [Addressing AS-i 2] tab.

2 Change the AS-i slave address

The procedure for addressing the AS-i slaves connected to AS-i master 2 is the same as for addressing the AS-i slaves connected to AS-i master 1 (→ Quick setup: address the AS-i slaves connected to AS-i master 1 (→ page 54)).

56


Menu AS-i 1 / AS-i 2

>

5.3 AS-i 1 / AS-i 2 14197

The [AS-i 1] and [AS-i 2] menus provide access to configuration functions of the AS-i networks.

The [AS-i 2] menu is only available for devices with two AS-i masters!

Navigation path Content

>

>

AS-i master settings → Set the operating mode of the AS-i master (→ page 57) → Carry out a projection adaptation (→ page 58) → Set the monitoring functions of the AS-i master (→ page 58)

>

>

AS-i network diagnosis → Display and reset the error counters (→ page 59) → Display the error statistics of the AS-i slaves (→ page 59) → Display the voltage supply analysis (→ page 60) → Display and reset performance data (→ page 60)

>

>

AS-i slave settings → Display the input/output data of the AS-i slave (→ page 61) → Change the digital output values manually (→ page 63) → Change the analogue output values manually (→ page 63) → Show AS-i slave information (→ page 64) → Change an AS-i slave address (→ page 65) → Change an AS-i slave parameter output (→ page 65) → Change the Extended ID1 of the AS-i slave (→ page 66)

57



>

5.3.1 AS-i 1 / AS-i 2: Master setup 8996

The menu item [Master setup] provides access to the configuration options of the selected AS-i master. >

Set the operating mode of the AS-i master 15877

More information on the operating modes of the AS-i master: → Operating modes of the AS-i master (→ page 137)

To set the operating mode of the AS-i master:


► > or >

2 Set the operating mode of AS-i master 1 and the behaviour of the connected AS-i slaves

> Set the following parameters as required:


[Projection mode] Active operating mode of the AS-i master

= Projection mode inactive: AS-i network operates in protected mode (normal mode)

= Projection mode active: AS-i network can be projected.

[No slave reset] Behaviour of the AS-i slaves when changing the operating mode

= Slave is reset when changing the operating mode: When changing the operating mode, the AS-i slaves will be reset for a short moment (reset or offline phase).

= Slave is not reset when changing the operating mode: When changing the operating mode, the AS-i slaves continue to operate without interruption.


58



>

Carry out a projection adaptation 8938

During projection adaptation, the AS-i master stores the configuration of all AS-i slaves currently found on the AS-i network in its memory and assigns a valid AS-i address to each of them.

The projection adaptation can only be carried out in projection mode:

► [Projection mode] must be checked (→ Set the operating mode of the AS-i master (→ page 57)).

To launch the projection adaptation:


► > or >

2 Carry out a projection adaptation

► Press [Start projection process] button.

> The projection adaptation is carried out.

If successful:

> All slaves on the AS-i master are projected.

If not successful:

> The Online Support Center displays an error message.

► Remove the error and repeat the process. >

Set the monitoring functions of the AS-i master 11728

To set the monitoring functions of the selected AS-i master:


► > or >

2 Set the monitoring functions of the AS-i master



[Automatic addressing] Behaviour if AS-i slave is replaced

= New AS-i slave obtains the next free address

= The new AS-i slave obtains the same address as the old AS-i slave if the following conditions are met: – The new AS-i slave has the address 0. – The old and the new AS-i slave have the same slave profile.

[Earth fault detection] Detection of earth faults = Do not detect earth faults in the AS-i system

= Detect earth faults in the AS-i system

[Double address detection]

Double address detection = Do not detect AS-i slaves with the same address

= Detect AS-i slaves with the same address


59



>

5.3.2 AS-i 1 / AS-i 2: Diagnosis 9039

The [Diagnosis] menu provides access to the diagnostic data of the selected AS-i network. >

Display and reset the error counters 9042

To display and reset the AS-i error counters:


► > or >

► Select [Error counters] tab.

2 Display the error counters

> Page shows the following information:

Designation Meaning

Telegrams Number of message errors that occurred

Configuration Number of configuration errors that occurred

Voltage < 22,5V Number of voltage errors < 22.5 V

Voltage < 19,0V Number of voltage errors < 19.0 V

Earth fault Number of detected earth faults

3 Optional: reset the error counters

► Press [Reset] button.

> All error counters are reset to 0. >

Display the error statistics of the AS-i slaves 9087

To display the error messages of the AS-i slaves on the selected AS-i master:


► > or >

► Select [Errors / slave] tab.

2 Display the error statistics of the AS-i slaves


Column header Meaning

Adress Address of the AS-i slave

S/A Number of errors of the single or A slave at this address

B Number of errors of the B slave at this address

► Use [] / [] to scroll through the table.

60



>

Display the voltage supply analysis 9088

To display the voltage supply analysis:


► > or >

► Select [Power supply] tab.

2 Display the voltage supply analysis


Designation Meaning Possible values

Power supply Method of voltage supply Aux = Voltage is supplied separately by the AS-i network and AUX 24 V.

AS-i = Voltage is only supplied by the AS-i network.

Power24 = Voltage is supplied by data decoupling module.

AS-i voltage AS-i voltage measured (in [V]) e.g. 30.3 V

DC earth fault Evaluation of the network symmetry =

AS-i network is symmetrical

= AS-i network is asymmetrical

= AS-i network has earth fault

Graphical representation of the network symmetry:

>

Display and reset performance data 9089

To display the performance statistics of the selected AS-i master:


► > or >

► Select [Performance] tab.

2 Display performance data


Designation Meaning

Activated slaves Number of active AS-i slaves on the AS-i network

AS-i cycle time [ms] AS-i cycle time (value in [ms])

minimum shortest cycle time

maximum longest cycle time

current current cycle time

3 Optional: reset the performance data


> The saved statistic data for minimum and maximum cycle times are deleted.

61



>

5.3.3 AS-i 1 / AS-i 2: AS-i slaves 9037

The [AS-i Slaves] menu provides access to information and configuration options of the AS-i slaves.

The scope of configuration options shown ([Data] and [Setup] tab) varies according to the status of the selected AS-i slaves.

>

Display the input/output data of the AS-i slave 10934

To display the input/output data or the parameter output of the selected AS-i slaves:


► > or >

► Select an AS-i slave (→ Slave selector (→ page 30)).

► Select [Data] tab.

2 Display input/output data

> Depending on the profile of the selected AS-i slave, the page displays the following data: >

Digital input 15972

Designation Meaning Example / Possible values

[Inputs] Current values of the digital inputs (binary and hexadecimal representation)

= Data bit is switched off (0 / OFF)

= Data bit is switched on (1 / ON)

>

Analogue input 15973


[Inputs] Current values of the analogue input channels and information about their status

[Valid] The Valid bit indicates whether the displayed value is valid.

= Invalid value

= Valid value

[Overflow] The Overflow bit indicates whether the displayed value is within the value range.

= Value within valid value range

= Valid value range exceeded

62



>

Digital output 15974


[Outputs] Current values of the digital outputs (binary and hexadecimal representation)



[Jog mode] The parameter controls the behaviour of the outputs in the event of a changed output value.

= Jog mode disabled ("switch mode")

> The changes do not affect the output until you quit the editing mode.

= Jog mode enabled ("momentary switch mode")

> The changes immediately affect the output.

>

Analogue output 15975


[Outputs] Current values of the analogue output channels and information about their status

[Analogue status]

Current status of the analogue outputs

= Not O.K.

= O.K.

[Channel x] Current value of the analogue output channel x (x = 1...n; n = number of channels per AS-i slave)

per digit: 0 ... 9

>

Parameter input 15843


[Parameter input] Current value of the parameter input (binary and hexadecimal representation)



63



>

Change the digital output values manually 10939

WARNING

Risk of personal injury! Risk of material damage to the machine/plant!

The operator is responsible for any consequences caused by the manual change of the digital ouput values!

► Secure the concerned area.

► Only trained personnel is allowed to set outputs manually.

If the jog mode is deactivated: After changing the slave outputs the output values remain on the changed values.

► Change the inverted outputs again immediately to the original values after the end of the test!

To change the digital output values of an AS-i slave manually:

1 Enable manual access to the outputs

► Set parameter [Output access] = Manual (→ Set the output access (→ page 75)).


► > or >



3 Set the digital output values manually

> The group [Outputs] displays the current value of the digital output (binary and hexadecimal representation).

► [Jog mode] to be set as required. (→ Digital output (→ page 62))

► Change the desired output value bit by bit.

> Selected value is applied. >

Change the analogue output values manually 10940

To change the analogue output values of an AS-i slave manually:


► Parameter [Output access] = set to Manual (→ Set the output access (→ page 75)).


► > or >



3 Set the analogue output values manually

> [Outputs] group shows the current value of the analogue output.

► Change the value of the requested channel one digit at a time (→ Numerical field (→ page 36)).

> Selected value is applied.

► Optional: repeat step 3 to change further channels.

64



>

Show AS-i slave information 10935

To display information about an AS-i slave:


► > or >


► Select [Information] tab.

2 Display information about the AS-i slave



[AS-i Slave address] Current address of the AS-i slave e.g. 13B

[Slave status] Current status of the AS-i slave = AS-i slave is active

= AS-i slave is missing

= Not projected

= Double address error

= Periphery fault

[AS-i slave profile] Current (= Current) and expected (= Preset) slave profile (IO, ID, ID2, ID1) in hexadecimal format

► Use [] / [] for page navigation.

65



>

Change an AS-i slave address 10944

To change the address of an AS-i slave:


► > or >


► Select [Setup] tab.

2 Change the address of the AS-i slave

► Press the [Change slave address] button.

> The page displays an overview of the free AS-i addresses (→ Overview of free slave addresses (→ page 33)).

► Select the address to be assigned to the AS-i slave and confirm with [Select] function key.

> Security prompt appears.

► Press [OK] to confirm the security prompt.

> The AS-i slave has a new address.

> The page displays an overview of the AS-i slave states (→ Overview of slave states (→ page 31)).

3 Optional: change further AS-i addresses.

► Repeat step 2 to change further AS-i slave addresses.

After the address change, the present configuration (LDS) no longer corresponds to the stored configuration (LPS).

> The OSC displays a configuration error.

To remove the configuration error:

► start a projection adaptation (→ Carry out a projection adaptation (→ page 58)).

>

Change an AS-i slave parameter output 10945

To change the parameter output of an AS-i slave:


► Set [Output access] = Manual (→ Set the output access (→ page 75))


► > or >



3 Change the parameter output of the AS-i slave

> The group [Parameter output] displays the current assignment of the parameter output (binary and hexadecimal representation).

► Adjust the desired output value one position at a time.


66



>

Change the Extended ID1 of the AS-i slave 10952

To set the Extended ID1 of an AS-i slave:


► > or >



2 Set the Extended ID1

> The list [ID1] displays the current Extended ID1 value (hexadecimal format).

► Select the desired value for Extended ID1 from the list [ID1].


After changing the Extended ID1, the existing configuration no longer corresponds to the stored configuration:

> An error message appears (configuration error).

► Start a projection adaptation (→ Carry out a projection adaptation (→ page 58)).

67


Menu System

>

5.4 System 8957

The [System] menu provides access to functions that allow configuration of the system and the device-internal PLC.


>

Device-internal PLC → System: Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) (→ page 68)

>

System information → Show version information (→ page 74)

>

System settings → Set the output access (→ page 75) → Enable/Disable the device-internal PLC (→ page 76) → Set the device cycle (→ page 77) → Switch the menu language (→ page 78) → Set the behaviour of the display (→ page 79) → Set the system time manually (→ page 81) → Synchronise the system time with an NTP server (→ page 82) → Adopt the system time of the PC (→ page 83) → Save the device configuration (→ page 84) → Restore the device configuration (→ page 85) → System reset (→ page 86) → Store diagnostic protocol (→ page 86)

>

System diagnostics → Display diagnostic data (→ page 87)

68


Menu System

>

5.4.1 System: Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) 8955

The [PLC] menu provides access to the device-internal PLC.


> >

PLC information: → Display the status of the CODESYS PLC (→ page 69) → Display information about PLC projects (→ page 69)

> >

PLC settings → Control a single PLC application (→ page 70) → Control PLC applications (→ page 71) → Show target visualisation (→ page 72)

> >

PLC diagnosis → Show memory used (→ page 73)


http://www.ifm.com/

69


Menu System

>

PLC: Information 11778

The [Information] menu item provides access to the PLC status and project information. >

Display the status of the CODESYS PLC 14841

To display information about the current status of the device-internal PLC:


► > >

► Select [Status] tab.

2 Display the status of the CODESYS PLC



Status LED Status of the device-internal PLC = The CODESYS PLC is disabled.

= The CODESYS PLC is enabled.

[Version] CODESYS version e.g. 3.5.3.60

[Node name] Name of device in CODESYS project e.g.

>

Display information about PLC projects 14842

To obtain information about the CODESYS project stored on the device-internal PLC:


► > >

► Select [Project] tab.

2 Display information about PLC projects


Designation Meaning

[Project] Name of the CODESYS project file

[Title] Name of the CODESYS project

[Version] Version number of the CODESYS project

[Author] Author of the CODESYS project

70


Menu System

>

PLC: Settings 16217

The [Settings] menu item provides access to the PLC applications (apps) on the device. >

Control a single PLC application 14846

[App x/y]

– x ... number of the app displayed – y ... total number of apps stored

Status and name of the application

= application has been stopped

= application has been started

Information concerning the application – date and time of creation – author – version of application – size

To control a single PLC application stored on the device:


► > >

► Select [Applications] tab.

2 Select an application

► Use [] to select the message field.

> The focus (orange frame) is on the message field.

► Use [] / [] to select the requested application.

► Perform one of the following actions: – Launch a single PLC application: continue with → step 3 – Stop a single PLC application: continue with → step 4

3 Launch a single PLC application

► Press [Start] to launch the selected PLC application.


► Press [OK] to confirm the prompt.

> The PLC application is started.


4 Stop a single PLC application

► Press [Stop] to stop the selected application.



> The application is stopped.

5 Display information about the PLC application

> The status display of the PLC application is updated

71


Menu System

>

Control PLC applications 14847

To control all PLC applications stored on the device:


► > >

► Select [All applications] tab.

2 Display status information about the PLC applications


Designation Meaning

[Total] Number of applications stored on the device

[Started] Number of applications running

► Perform one of the following actions: – Launch all PLC applications: continue with → step 3 – Stop all PLC applications: continue with → step 4 – Reset all PLC applications: continue with → step 5

3 Launch all PLC applications

► Press [Start] button.



> All PLC applications are started.


4 Stop all PLC applications

► Press [Stop] button.

> The confirmation prompt appears


> All PLC applications are stopped.


5 Reset all PLC applications




> All PLC applications are reset and stopped.

6 Display the status of the PLC applications

> The page shows updated information about the stored PLC applications.

> The status of the [Start], [Stop] and [Reset] buttons is updated.

72


Menu System

>

Show target visualisation 9055

Using the CODESYS programming system, the user can optionally program a target visualisation to create an application-specific user interface for the display of AC142n. The target visualisation is loaded onto the device together with the CODESYS project, but it must be activated manually.

If no valid target visualisation is stored on the device, a green screen appears after activating the [Activate Target-Visu] button

To exit the target visualisation and return to the menu page:

► Press [] and [] simultaneously.

If the device does not react when entering [] + [], the key combination is deactivated.

► Activate the key combination using the system command "Show target visualisation" (→ Command 272 (0x0110) – Display target visualisation (→ page 267))!

To activate the target visualisation:

1 Select menu page

► > >

► Select the [Activate TargetVisu] tab.

2 Start the target visualisation

► Press [Activate Target-Visu] button.

> The confirmation message appears.

► Press [OK] button to confirm the message.

> The display shows the target visualisation.

73


Menu System

>

PLC: Diagnosis 10936

The [Diagnosis] menu item provides access to diagnostic data of the device-internal PLC. >

Show memory used 14845

To display information about the memory capacity currently used:


► > >

► Select [Memory] tab.

2 Show memory used


Designation Meaning

CODESYS Memory capacity occupied by CODESYS data (in Kbytes)

free Free memory (in Kbytes)

The current usage of memory space is read out once when calling up the menu page. These values are not refreshed while the menu page is displayed. Any changes regarding the memory capacity (e.g. through download of a new CODESYS project) will therefore not be reflected in the displayed values.

To update the displayed values:

► Quit the menu page [Diagnosedaten].

► Access the menu page [Diagnosedaten] again.

> The menu page displays the current memory usage of device.

74


Menu System

>

5.4.2 System: Information 7281

The menu item [Information] provides access to the version information about the system components. >

Show version information 11774

To display information about the hardware and software components of the device:


► >

► Select [Version] tab.

2 Show version information



[Type] Article number of the device e.g. AC142n

[SN] Serial number of the device e.g. 000000113034

[Build] Version number of the installed firmware e.g. 3.1.2

[HW version] Version number of the device main board e.g. AA

75


Menu System

>

5.4.3 System: Setup 7274

The [Setup] menu item provides access to the configuration options of the system. >

Set the output access 9100

To set the control instance for the outputs of the AS-i slaves:


► >

► Select [System settings] tab.

2 Configure the control instance for the outputs of the AS-i slaves

► From the [Output access] list, select the required value:


[Output access] Control instance of the AS-i slave outputs

Gateway = A higher-level PLC controls the outputs of the AS-i slaves.

Manual = The operator controls the outputs of the AS-i slaves via the graphical user interface.

PLC = The device-internal PLC controls the outputs of the AS-i slaves.

3 Save the changes


> The selected instance controls the outputs of the AS-i slaves.

If the value PLC is selected, the system will automatically enable the device-internal PLC (→ Enable/Disable the device-internal PLC (→ page 76)).

76


Menu System

>

Enable/Disable the device-internal PLC 15841

NOTICE

Risk of material damage to the machine/plant!

When disabling the device-internal PLC, all running PLC applications will be stopped. This could have undesirable effects on the controlled process if the PLC figures as the control unit for the AS-i slave outputs.

► The PLC application should be terminated in a controlled manner before disabling the device-internal PLC! (→ Control PLC applications (→ page 71))

► Implement a safe state when programming the PLC applications!

When activating the device-internal PLC, PLC applications stored on the device are started automatically.

► Implement a safe start state when programming the PLC applications!

To set the internal Programmable Logic Controller (PLC):


► >


2 Enable/Disable the device-internal PLC

> Set the following parameters in the group [Activate CODESYS PLC]:


[Use PLC] State of the device-internal CODESYS PLC

= Device-internal PLC is disabled.

= Device-internal PLC is enabled.


77


Menu System

>

Set the device cycle 11780

NOTICE

Risk of material damage to the machine/plant!

A device cycle that is too short can have undesirable effects on the correct transmission of the process and control data between the PLC and peripheral devices (higher-level PLC, AS-i slaves).

► Ensure a sufficiently long cycle time!

If the PLC is disabled, the device operates with a fixed cycle time of 0.7 ms.

If the PLC is enabled, the operator can set the device cycle to a value between 1.5 ms and

3.0 ms. (→ Enable/Disable the device-internal PLC (→ page 76))

To set the device cycle:


► >


2 Set the device cycle



[Device cycle] Active → Device parameters. 1.5 ms = 1.5 milliseconds

2.0 ms = 2.0 milliseconds



3 Save the changes

► Press [Accept selection].


78


Menu System

>

Switch the menu language 7088

To select the language of the GUI texts:


► >


2 Select the menu language

> The list [Language] shows the active language in which the GUI texts are displayed.



[Language] Language in which the GUI texts are displayed

Deutsch = German

English = English

Français = French

Español = Spanish

Italiano = Italian

Português = Portuguese

3 Save the changes


> GUI elements are displayed in the requested language. >

Optional: switch the language with a key combination 15834

The languages available on the device are saved in an ordered list:

German

English

French

Spanish

Italian

Portuguese

To switch the language with a key combination (from the active language):

► Press [] + [] to select the previous language in the list.

OR:

► Press [] + [] to select the next language in the list.

> GUI elements are displayed in the requested language.

The key combination allows you to change the language from any menu page.

79


Menu System

>

Set the behaviour of the display 9107

To set the display behaviour (screen saver, behaviour in case of inactivity):


► >


2 Set the behaviour of the display



[Screen saver] Status of the screen saver = Screen saver is inactive: Display remains permanently switched on.

= Screen saver is active: Display is switched off after 10 minutes of inactivity.

[Return to start screen] Display behaviour in case of extended period of user inactivity

= The currently selected menu page stays on the screen.

= When the set time has elapsed, the display automatically changes to the start screen.


80


Menu System

>

Set the system time 10954

The system time consists of date and time. The device provides the following options for setting the system time:

Manual: The operator sets the date and time manually.

Via NTP server: The device has an NTP client. The system time can be synchronised with an NTP server.

Apply the system time of a PC/laptop:

The device adopts the system time of a PC/laptop (only available via the web interface of the device)

To set the system time:


► >

► Select [Clock] tab.

2 Display the current system time settings

> The following parameters display the current system time settings:


[Activate NTP] = NTP client is deactivated: Device adopts the manually set values for [Time] and [Date].

= NTP client is not active: From an NTP server, the device adopts the values for [Time] and [Date].

Status LED Status of NTP client and synchronisation with NTP server

NTP not active = NTP client is deactivated: Applicable are the manually set values for [Time] and [Date].

NTP waiting = NTP client is active: Device waits for messages from NTP server.

NTP successful = NTP client is active: Time synchronisation with NTP server was successful.

[Time] System time (format [hh:mm:ss])

e.g. 12:23:56

[Date] System date (format [yyyy-mm-dd])

e.g. 2014-04-23

3 Select the configuration method

► Select one of the following: – Set the system time manually (→ page 81) – Synchronise the system time with an NTP server (→ page 82) – Adopt the system time of the PC (→ page 83)

81


Menu System

>

Set the system time manually 10963

To set the system time manually:


► >


2 Deactivate the NTP client of the device

► Uncheck [Activate NTP] (→ Set the system time (→ page 80)).


> The changes become effective.

> NTP status: NTP not active

3 Set the system time manually

► [Time] and [Date] must be set (Operating notes: → Numerical field (→ page 36))


Seconds cannot be changed manually. When leaving the edit mode, the seconds will be automatically set to 0.

82


Menu System

>

Synchronise the system time with an NTP server 10969

To synchronise the system time with an NTP server:

To synchronise the system time and date via Network Time Protocol (NTP), connect the configuration interface of the device to an NTP server directly or over a network.


► >


2 Deactivate the NTP client


> The IP address field and the [NTP-Offset] list can be edited.

3 Set the IP address of the NTP server and NTP offset



IP address field IP address of the NTP server e.g. 192.168.0.100

List [NTP-Offset]

(optional)

Time zone of the NTP server in UTC (Universal Coordinated Time).

no offset = System time is taken from NTP server without offset

UTC -12:00 ...

UTC +12:00

Adopt time zones according to UTC division (displayed number of hours will be added/subtracted)


> The device tries to synchronise the system time with the NTP server.

> NTP status: NTP waiting

In case of a successful synchronisation:

> NTP status: NTP successful

> [Time] and [Date] show the synchronised values.

In case of a failed synchronisation:

► Check the settings of the IP parameters of the configuration interface.

► Check the IP address of the NTP server.

► Repeat the process.

83


Menu System

>

Adopt the system time of the PC 15756

This function can only be executed via the web interface of the device.

To adopt the date and time of a PC/laptop:

1 Go to the web interface of the device

► Connect the PC/laptop to the configuration interface (X3) of the device.

► Start the web browser and access the web interface of the device.


► >

► Select the [Clock] tab.

3 Adopt the system time of the PC/laptop


► In group [Apply Time and Date from the PC] press [OK].

> The device applies the date and time of the PC/laptop.

> [Date] and [Time] display the system time.

84


Menu System

>

Clone device configuration 7087

The AC142n makes it possible to create an image of the current device configuration, to transfer it to another device and activate there (clone). The export/import of the configuration file is made via an SD card.

A device configuration consists of the following settings:

System settings

AS-i 1/AS-i 2 settings

EtherNet/IP settings

PLC applications (incl. PLC task configuration and variables)

The user can only access this function via the local user interface of the device!

Cloning a device configuration is only possible if the following conditions are met.

Source and target device have the same firmware version

Source and target device have the same article number.

>

Save the device configuration 16199

Pay attention to the notes (→ Clone device configuration (→ page 84))!

To save the currently valid device configuration on an SD card:


► >

> Select [Configuration] tab.

2 Save the device configuration

► Insert an SD card with sufficient free space in the SD card slot.

► Press [Export Configuration].

> The device stores the currently valid device configuration on the SD card.

85


Menu System

>

Restore the device configuration 14442

NOTICE

Risk of undesirable system behaviour!

The AC142n is not available during the recovery process.

► Ensure by means of organisational measures that the AC142n system is in the safe state during the recovery process!

16200

NOTICE

Risk of data loss and undesirable system behaviour!

If the import of the device configuration is interrupted (e.g. because the device is disconnected from the electric circuit), not all the configuration data will saved on the device.

► Do not interrupt the recovery process!

► Ensure a stable voltage supply!

Pay attention to the notes (→ Clone device configuration (→ page 84))!

If there are more than one device configurations stored in the root directory of the SD card, then the newest file (time stamp) will be used for the restoring process.

To transfer a stored device configuration to the device:


► >

► Select [Configuration] tab.

2 Restore the device configuration

► Insert an SD card with the stored device configuration in the SD card slot.

► Press [Import configuration] button.

> A warning message appears.

► Use [OK] to confirm the message.

> The device configuration is loaded and saved onto the device.

The device reboots.

86


Menu System

>

System reset 8977

To reset the device:


► >

► Select [Reset] tab.

2 Carry out a system reset

► Press [Restart].

> A safety query is displayed..

► Press [OK] to confirm the security prompt.

> The device reboots. >

Store diagnostic protocol 7040

Using the diagnostic protocol, the user can archive the current device configuration or provide all relevant information to the service staff via the device settings.

The diagnostic protocol contains the following information in the selected user language:

AS-i configuration

EtherNet/IP configuration

System settings

CODESYS information

OSC history

This function is only available via the web-interface of the device (→ Remote access (→ page 39)).

Requirements:

► Connect the device with PC/laptop (→ Configuration interface: connection concepts (→ page 133)).

► Start the web browser and open the web interface of the device (→ Recommended browsers (→ page 40)).

1 Select menu page

► >

► Select the [Diagnostic protocol] tab.

2 Store diagnostic protocol

► Press the [Generate diagnostic protocol] button.

> AC142n generates diagnostic protocol.

> The progress bar indicates the status of the process.

> A dialogue window appears.

► Select file name and memory location and press [OK] to confirm.

> The diagnostic protocol is stored as an HTML file at the selected location.

87


Menu System

>

5.4.4 System: Diagnosis 9053:

The [Diagnosis] menu item provides access to the diagnostic data of the device. >

Display diagnostic data 15827

To display the diagnostic data of the device:


► >

2 Display the diagnostic data



Operating time [YY-DDD HH:MM]

Operating time of system and components

All times indicated in [YY-DDD-HH:MM] format:

YY = years DDD = days HH = hours MM = minutes

total Operating time of device

current Operating time of device since last system start

LCD Operating time of LCD

PLC Operating time of controller

Temperature Current device temperature Indications in [°C] (→ Note)

Power supply Voltage supply of device Aux = Voltage is supplied separately by AS-i network and AUX 24 V.

AS-i = Voltage is only supplied by the AS-i network.

Power module = Voltage is supplied by data decoupling module.

The temperature monitoring of AC142n continuously checks whether the system temperature exceeds the maximum permissible values. If certain limit values are exceeded, the temperature monitoring generates warnings or error messages which are displayed in the → Online Support Center (OSC) (→ page 123).

The following temperature ranges apply:

Normal zone (0 °C ... 80 °C): no warnings, no error messages

Transitional zone (80.1 °C ... 85 °C): warnings

Critical zone: (> 85.1 °C): error messages

88


Menu Interfaces

>

5.5 Interfaces 15143

The [Interfaces] menu provides access to the configuration options of the device's interfaces.


>

Configuration interface → Configure the IP parameters manually (→ page 90) → Configure the IP parameters automatically (→ page 90) → Show EtherNet information (→ page 91)

>

EtherNet/IP interface → Interfaces: EtherNet/IP interface (→ page 92)

89


Menu Interfaces

>

5.5.1 Interfaces: Configuration interface 7279

The [Configuration interface] menu provides access to the settings of the EtherNet configuration interface (port X3). >

Notes on IP settings 14856

The device provides the following options for configuration of the Ethernet configuration interface:


Automatic = The interface parameters are set automatically. The operator can choose between these protocols:

– Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) – Zero Configuration Networking (Zeroconf)

To display the current configuration method and the active IP parameters of the configuration interface:


► >

► Select [IP setup] tab.

2 Show the active settings



[Optain IP address autom.]

Active method for the configuration of the interface parameters

= Manual assignment of interface parameters through operator

= Automatic assignment of interface parameters

[IP status] Configuration protocol used Static = The operator sets the IP parameters manually.

DHCP = The IP parameters are set by a DHCP server.

Zeroconf = The IP parameters are set automatically with the Zeroconf protocol.



e.g. 255.255.255.0


e.g. 192.168.0.1

► Select one of the following options: – Configure the IP parameters manually (→ page 90) – Configure the IP parameters automatically (→ page 90)

90


Menu Interfaces

>

Configure the IP parameters manually 14860

To configure the IP parameters of the configuration interface manually:


► >


2 Deactivate the NTP client

► Uncheck [Optain IP address autom.] (→ Notes on IP settings (→ page 89)).

> The IP address fields [IP address], [Subnet mask] and [Gateway address] can be edited.

3 Configure the IP parameters

► Configure the following parameters as required (→ Notes on IP settings (→ page 89)): – [IP address] – [Subnet mask] – [Gateway address]

4 Save the changes

► Press [Accept] button.


> [IP status] displays the active configuration method: Static >

Configure the IP parameters automatically 14859

The device must be connected to a DHCP server to automatically receive the interface parameters via DHCP.

► Connect the configuration interface (X3) to a DHCP server.

To configure the IP parameters of the configuration interface automatically:


► >


2 Enable the NTP client

► Activate the [Optain IP address autom.] check box (→ Notes on IP settings (→ page 89))

3 Save the changes


> The device tries to obtain the IP parameters from a DHCP server.

> If the configuration of IP parameters via DHCP server fails, the device will generate the IP parameters with the Zeroconf protocol.

> [IP address], [Subnet mask] and [Gateway address] display the set IP parameters.


> [IP status] displays the active configuration method: DHCP or Zeroconf.

The automatic configuration of the IP parameters takes approx. 10 seconds.

91


Menu Interfaces

>

Show EtherNet information 14857

To show Ethernet information regarding the configuration interface:


► >

► Select [Ethernet informationen] tab.

2 Show Ethernet information

> The page shows the following information:

Designation Meaning

[MAC ID] MAC identification number of the interface

92


Menu Interfaces

>

5.5.2 Interfaces: EtherNet/IP interface 16197

The [EtherNet/IP] menu provides access to information, settings and diagnostic data of the EtherNet/IP interface.


> >

EtherNet/IP information → Show information (→ page 93) → Display EtherNet/IP data (→ page 94) → Display the module configuration (→ page 94) → Download the device and I/O description (→ page 95)

> >

EtherNet/IP settings → Configure the IP parameters manually (→ page 97) → Configure the IP parameters automatically (→ page 97) → Set the configuration mode (→ page 98) → Set the device-specific parameters (→ page 99) → Set the EtherNet/IP module configuration (→ page 101)

> >

EtherNet/IP diagnosis → Display diagnostic data (→ page 103)

93


Menu Interfaces

>

EtherNet/IP: Information 11781

The menu item [Information] provides access to information regarding the EtherNet/IP interface. >

Show information 12166

To display information about the EtherNet/IP interface:


► > >

► Select [Information] tab.

2 Show information about the EtherNet/IP interface


Designation Meaning

[Manufacturer ID] Displays the manufacturer ID

[Unit type] Displays the device type

[Product code] Displays the product code

[Revision no.] Displays the revision number

[SN] Displays the serial number

[Product name] Displays the product name

94


Menu Interfaces

>

Display EtherNet/IP data 12168

To display the EtherNet/IP data:


► > >


2 Display EtherNet/IP data



[MAC-ID] MAC ID of the EtherNet/IP interface e.g. 00:02:01:01:27:CF

[RPI Zeit] RPI time in milliseconds [ms] (RPI = Requested Packet Interval)

[Analog. channels/O-slave]

Number of analogue channels per input slave

→ Set the device-specific parameters (→ page 99)


Number of analogue channels per output slave


[Failsafe state] Behaviour of the AS-i outputs in case of an interrupted EtherNet/IP connection


[Parameter download] The AS-i slave parameters are transferred when a EtherNet/IP connection is established.

Parameter can only be configured via the projection software!

= Parameters are not downloaded, i.e. the AS-i slaves are activated using the parameters that are set in the device.

= Each time a EtherNet/IP connection is established, the AS-i slave parameters are loaded from the EtherNet/IP controller to the device, activated in the slaves and stored non-volatilely.

[Change byte order] Byte order in a data word

The set parameter value applies to all attached tables.


>

Display the module configuration 12193

To display the current module configuration:


► > > .

► Select [Module configuration] tab.

2 Display the module configuration

> The page shows the active configuration of the EtherNet/IP slots. (Meaning of parameter values:→ Set the EtherNet/IP module configuration (→ page 101))

95


Menu Interfaces

>

Download the device and I/O description 12194

This function is only available via the web-interface of the device (→ Remote access (→ page 39)).

Requirements:

► Connect the device with PC/laptop (→ Configuration interface: connection concepts (→ page 133)).

► Start the web browser and open the web interface of the device (→ Recommended browsers (→ page 40)).


► > >

► Select [File download] tab.

> The menu screen [File download] appears.

2 Download the EDS file and the description of the inputs and outputs.

► Click the link [Download EDS-Datei] to download the device description.

► Click the button [Download I/O Description file].

> The web server creates a description file of the inputs and outputs.

► Save the created file.

96


Menu Interfaces

>

EtherNet/IP: Setup 16196

The [Setup] menu item provides access to the configuration options of the EtherNet/IP interface. >

Notes on IP settings 12228

The device provides the following options for configuration of the EtherNet/IP interface:


Automatic = The interface parameters are automatically set through one of the following protocols.

– Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) – Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP)

To display the current configuration method for IP parameters of the EtherNet/IP interface:


► > >

► Select [Fieldbus] tab.

2 Display the current configuration method for IP parameters

> The [IP mode] list shows the active configuration method:

- Static = The operator sets the IP parameters manually.

- DHCP = The device receives the IP parameters from a DHCP server.

- BOOTP = The device receives the IP parameters from a BOOTP server.

3 Display the current IP parameters of the EtherNet/IP interface

> The following parameters show the current IP settings of the EtherNet/IP interface:

Designation Meaning

[IP address] IP address of the configuration interface

[Subnet mask] Subnet mask of the network segment

[Gateway address] IP address of the EtherNet gateway

97


Menu Interfaces

>

Configure the IP parameters manually 15883

To manually configure the IP parameters of the EtherNet/IP interface:


► > >


2 Activate the manual configuration

► From the list [IP mode], select the value Static (→ Notes on IP settings (→ page 96)).

> The IP address fields [IP address], [Subnet mask] and [Gateway address] can be edited.

3 Set the IP parameters of the EtherNet/IP interface

► Set the following parameters as required: – [IP address] – [Subnet mask] – [Gateway address]

4 Save the changes


> Selected values are applied. >

Configure the IP parameters automatically 15881

In order to obtain the interface parameters automatically via DHCP or BOOTP, the device must be connected to a DHCP or BOOTP server.

► Connect the EtherNet/IP interfaces (X6/X7) to a DHCP/BOOTP server.


► > >


2 Select the configuration method

► From the list [IP mode], select either DHCP or BOOTP.

3 Save the changes


> The device receives the IP parameters from a DHCP or BOOTP server.


> [IP address], [Subnet mask] and [Gateway address] show the current values.

98


Menu Interfaces

>

Set the configuration mode 15884

More information: → Configuration mode (→ page 335)

To set the configuration mode of the device:


► > >


2 Select the configuration method for the EtherNet/IP parameters

> Set the following parameter as required:


[configuration mode] Active configuration mode of the device

Top-Down = The device-specific parameters and the module configuration are set via the projection software of the EtherNet/IP controller.

Independent = The parameters of the EtherNet/IP interface are set via the graphical user interface of the device.

3 Save the changes

► Press [Accept].


99


Menu Interfaces

>

Set the device-specific parameters 15909

The parameters can only be changed if the configuration mode is set to Independent (→ Set the configuration mode (→ page 98)).

To set the device-specific parameters: set the number of channels to be transmitted per analogue input slave:


► > >

► Select [Parameter] tab.

2 Set the number of analogue channels per input slave

► Set the following parameter as required:


[Analog. channels/I-slave] Number of analogue channels transmitted per input slave

1 channel per A/B = 1 channel per A/B slave OR: channels 1 + 3 per single slave

1 channel = 1 channel per single slave OR: 1 channel per A slave

2 channels = 2 channels per single slave OR: 2 channels per A slave

4 channels = 4 channels per single slave OR: 2 channels per A/B slave

3 Set the number of analogue channels per output slave




Number of analogue channels transmitted per output slave

1 channel per A/B = 1 channel per A/B slave OR: channels 1 + 3 per single slave

1 channel = 1 channel per single slave OR: 1 channel per A slave

2 channels = 2 channels per single slave OR: 2 channels per A slave

4 channels = 4 channels per single slave OR: 2 channels per A/B slave

100


Menu Interfaces

4 Set the failsafe state



[Failsafe state] Behaviour of the slave outputs in case of an interrupted EtherNet/IP connection

Hold outputs = The outputs hold the values which were present immediately before the connection was interrupted.

Output reset = The outputs are reset to their initial values.

5 Set the byte order of a word



[Change byte order] Byte order in a data word = Byte order remains unchanged.

= Byte order is inverted.

6 Save the changes

► Press [Accept].


101


Menu Interfaces

>

Set the EtherNet/IP module configuration 12230

NOTICE

Risk of data loss!

For the transmission of cyclic process data between the device and the EtherNet/IP PLC, a limited number of data words is available for each direction of transmission:

Input data (= modules 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 10, 13, 14): 248 words

Output data (= modules 2, 4, 6, 8, 11, 12, 15): 248 words

If the EtherNet/IP modules have been parameterised in such a way that the cyclic input and output data comprise more than 248 words per direction of transmission, any data from the 249th word will not be transmitted and will therefore be lost.

► Parameterise the EtherNet/IP modules in a way to ensure that the input and output data do not exceed the maximum number of words to be transmitted!

The EtherNet/IP modules can only be configured on the device if the configuration mode is set to Independent (→ Set the configuration mode (→ page 98)).

To define which cyclic process data are to be transmitted in the EtherNet/IP slots:


► > >

► Select [Module configuration] tab.

2 Set the EtherNet/IP slots for the digital inputs and outputs of the AS-i slaves

> Set the following parameters as required:


[EtherNet/IP Slot 1] Digital inputs of the S/A slaves connected to AS-i master 1

→ Slot 1 – Digital input data single or A slaves, AS-i master 1 (→ page 183)

[EtherNet/IP Slot 2] Digital outputs of the S/A slaves connected to AS-i master 1

→ Slot 2 – Digital output data single or A slaves, AS-i master 1 (→ page 183)

[EtherNet/IP Slot 3] Digital inputs of the S/A slaves connected to AS-i master 2 (only devices with 2 AS-i masters)


[EtherNet/IP Slot 4] Digital outputs of the S/A slaves connected to AS-i master 2 (only devices with 2 AS-i masters)


[EtherNet/IP Slot 5] Digital inputs of the B slaves connected to AS-i master 1

→ Slot 5 – Digital input data B slaves, AS-i master 1 (→ page 185)

[EtherNet/IP Slot 6] Digital outputs of the B slaves connected to AS-i master 1

→ Slot 6 – Digital output data B slaves, AS-i master 1 (→ page 185)

[EtherNet/IP Slot 7] Digital inputs of the B slaves connected to AS-i master 2 (only devices with 2 AS-i masters)


[EtherNet/IP Slot 8] Digital outputs of the B slaves connected to AS-i master 2 (only devices with 2 AS-i masters)


102


Menu Interfaces

3 Set the EtherNet/IP slots for the analogue inputs and outputs of the AS-i slaves



[EtherNet/IP Slot 9] Analogue inputs, area 1 → Slot 9 – Analogue input data (→ page 189)

[EtherNet/IP Slot 10] Analogue inputs, area 2 → Slot 10 – Analogue input data (→ page 190)

[EtherNet/IP Slot 11] Analogue outputs, area 1 → Slot 11 – Analogue output data (→ page 191)

[EtherNet/IP Slot 12] Analogue outputs, area 2 → Slot 12 – Analogue output data (→ page 192)

What data is transmitted in each word depends on the set values of the parameters [Analog. channels/I-Slave] and [Analog. channels/O-Slave]. → Set the device-specific parameters (→ page 99)

4 Configure the EtherNet/IP slot for diagnostic data



[EtherNet/IP Slot 13] Diagnostic data transmitted to the fieldbus controller

→ Slot 13 – Diagnostic data (→ page 197)

5 Set the EtherNet/IP slots for the data between the EtherNet/IP controller and the device-internal PLC



[EtherNet/IP Slot 14] Scope of data transferred from the device-internal PLC to the EtherNet/IP controller.

→ Slot 14 – Inputs from PLC (→ page 215)

[EtherNet/IP Slot 15] Scope of data transferred from the EtherNet/IP controller to the device-internal PLC.

→ Slot 15 – Outputs to PLC (→ page 216)

7 Save the changes

► Press [Accept].


103


Menu Interfaces

>

EtherNet/IP: Diagnosis 9126

The menu item [Diagnosis] provides access to the diagnostic data of the EtherNet/IP interface: >

Display diagnostic data 15875

To display the diagnostic data of the EtherNet/IP interfaces:


► > >

2 Display diagnostic data



[EtherNet/IP connection status] Displays the connection status of the EtherNet/IP interfaces

Status Port X6 Connection status port X6 = No connection to fieldbus controller

= Connection to fieldbus controller established

Status Port X7 Connection status port X7 = No connection to fieldbus controller

= Connection to fieldbus controller established

104


Menu ifm system solutions

>

5.6 ifm system solutions 7065

This menu is only available via the web interface of AC142n. → Remote access (→ page 39)

The [ifm system solutions] menu provides access to information and installation options for ifm system solutions.


ifm system solutions: → Show information about installed ifm apps (→ page 106) → Install single/basic app (→ page 107) → Install multi app (→ page 108) → Update ifm apps (→ page 109) → Uninstall ifm apps (→ page 109)

105



>

5.6.1 Notes on ifm system solutions 12229

With the AC142n, ifm electronic offers different system solutions for the simple implementation of typical applications. System solutions consist of applications which are processed by the device-internal CODESYS PLC.

ifm system solutions and user-created applications must not be stored and run simultaneously on the AC142n!

► Delete all CODESYS system solutions stored on the device before installing new ifm system solutions or user applications!

ifm system solutions can only be installed and run if the device-internal PLC is activated.

► Activate the PLC of the AC142n (→ Enable/Disable the device-internal PLC (→ page 76))!

Users can download the available ifm system solutions from ifm's website. → www.ifm.com > Service > Download > Industrial communication

>

Types of ifm system solutions 8682

There are 2 types of ifm system solutions:

Single apps Single apps provide the user with a CODESYS-based solution. Single apps directly access the I/O mechanisms of the CODESYS PLC. Only one single app must be stored and executed on the device.

Basic app + multi apps Multi apps provide the user with the possibility to execute different CODESYS-based solutions in parallel. The multi apps use the services of the basic app in order to be able to access the inputs and outputs of AC142n at the same time. They operate as a pure communication layer between the I/O mechanisms of the CODESYS PLC and the connected multi apps. Maximum 5 multi apps at a time can be stored and executed in parallel on the device.

http://www.ifm.com/

106



>

5.6.2 Show information about installed ifm apps 9041

In order to display information about the ifm system solutions installed on the device:

1 Select menu page

►

► Select the [Information] tab.

2 Show information about installed ifm apps

> The browser window displays an overview of the installed ifm apps. The following information is displayed for each ifm app:

Information Meaning

[Name] Designation of the ifm system solution app

[Version] Version number of the ifm system solution app

[Type] Type of ifm app (single, basic, multi)

[Description] Description of the functionality of the ifm system solution app

[Licence information] Licence information about the ifm system solution in the selected user language

[Link to the ifm system solution app] Hyperlink for web visualisation of the ifm system solution app

107



>

5.6.3 Install single/basic app 7092

Only one single app, basic app or CODESYS PLC application must be stored on the device.

When installing a single/basic app, all ifm system solutions and CODESYS PLC applications stored on the device are deleted.

To install a single or basic app on the device:

1 Select menu page

►

► Select the [Installation] tab.

2 Select single/basic app

► Activate the [Search] button.


► Select the requested single/basic app (*.ifmapp) and click [Open] to load it.

> The file name of the selected single/basic app is displayed.

3 Transfer the single/basic app to the device

► Click on [Transfer file] button to transfer the selected single/basic app to the device.


> After successful transfer: The window shows information about the copied single/basic app.

► Optional: Click on [Cancel] to stop the download process.

4 Install the single/basic app

► Activate the [Start installation] button.

> CODESYS PLC is stopped.

> All ifm system solutions and CODESYS PLC applications on the device are deleted.

> The selected single/basic app is installed.

> The progress bar indicates the status of the installation process.

> CODESYS PLC is started.

> The installed single/basic app is automatically started (RUN state).

108



>

5.6.4 Install multi app 6954

Maximum 5 multi apps must be stored on the device simultaneously.

To install a multi app on the device:

Requirements:

> The basic app is installed and started (RUN state) (→ Install single/basic app (→ page 107))

1 Select menu page

►

► Select the [Installation] tab.

2 Select multi app

► Activate the [Search] button.


► Select the requested multi app (*.ifmapp) and click the [Open] button to load it.

> The file name of the selected multi app is displayed.

3 Transfer the multi app onto the device

► Click on [Transfer file] to transfer the selected multi app onto the device.


> After successful transfer: The window shows information about the copied multi app.

► Optional: Click on [Cancel] to stop the download process.

4 Install multi app

► Activate the [Start installation] button.


> The selected multi app is installed.

> The progress bar indicates the status of the installation process.


> The installed multi app is automatically started (RUN state).

► Optional: Repeat steps 2 to 4 to install further multi apps.

109



>

5.6.5 Update ifm apps 6925

The user can update an ifm system solution installed on the device by overwriting it with the new version of the ifm system solution.

Naming convention for ifm apps:

AppName_x.y.z.ifmapp

AppName = x.y.z = ifmapp =

name of the ifm app version number of the ifm app file extension of an ifm app

To update an ifm system solution:

Requirements:

> The name of the new ifm app and the installed ifm app must be identical.

> The version number of the ifm app must be greater than that of the installed ifm app.

To determine the version of the installed ifm app: → Show information about installed ifm apps (→ page 106)

1 Download new ifm app

► Download new version of the ifm system solution (→ Notes on ifm system solutions (→ page 105)).

2 Update the installed ifm app

► Install the new ifm system solution – Single/basic app: → Install single/basic app (→ page 107) – multi app: → Install multi app (→ page 108)

>

5.6.6 Uninstall ifm apps 7014

When a basic app is uninstalled, all dependent multi apps are uninstalled, too.

Before uninstalling an ifm app, the CODESYS PLC of AC142n is stopped. After successful uninstallation, the CODESYS PLC is started again.

To uninstall an ifm system solution installed on the device:

1 Display installed ifm apps

► Show information about installed ifm apps (→ page 106)

2 Uninstall ifm app

► In the section of the respective ifm app: Activate the [Uninstall app] button.


> The selected ifm app is uninstalled.


110


Setup ifm system solutions

6 Setup

Connect the device ...............................................................................................................................111 Start screen 'Basic settings' ..................................................................................................................111 Update the firmware of the device ........................................................................................................114 Connect and address AS-i slaves ........................................................................................................118 Setup of EtherNet/IP .............................................................................................................................118 Setup of the configuration interface ......................................................................................................118 Exchange AS-i slave ............................................................................................................................119

15844

This section provides information for setting up the device following mounting, electrical installation and connection to AS-i network components.

Observe the notes on mounting and electrical connection of the device!

→ Operating instructions (supplied with the device)

111


Setup Connect the device

>

6.1 Connect the device 9000

>

6.1.1 EtherNet/IP interface 12120

To connect the device to a EtherNet/IP network:

► Integrate the device into the EtherNet/IP network via the X6 and/or X7 EtherNet ports according to the requested topology. Details → Interfaces (→ page 130)

>

6.1.2 Configuration interface 12122

To access the device via the configuration interface (e.g. web interface, programming interface of the device-internal PLC):

► Select one of the connection concepts to connect the configuration interface (X3) to the programming PC/laptop. Details: → Configuration interface: connection concepts (→ page 133)

6.2 Start screen 'Basic settings' 11226

The 'Basic settings' start screen appears after the following actions/events:

initial setup

firmware update

data loss due to battery failure

The basic settings provide access to the GUI texts, system time, etc.

The same operating notes as for the page view apply for the 'Basic settings' start screen (→ Page view (→ page 25)).

112


Setup Start screen 'Basic settings'

>

6.2.1 Change the basic settings of the device 18511

To change the basic settings of the device:

1 Start the device

► Connect the device to a circuit.

> The device starts.

> The display shows the start screen "Basic settings" (picture).

2 Set the language of the GUI texts

► The list shows the active language.

► Use [] / []to select the list.

> The focus (= orange frame) is on the selected list.

► Open the list with the left function key [Select].

► Use [] / [] to mark the desired language and press [Select] to activate it.

> The GUI texts appear in the selected language.

► Press [Next] to go to the next page.

3 Set the system time

Option 1: Set the system time manually

► [Time] and [Date] show the current system time.

► Activate [Activate NTP] checkbox.

> Status LED =

► In the [Time] roup, set the desired clock time one position at a time.

► In the [Date] group, set the desired date one position at a time.

► Press [Finish] to save the changes and go to the standard start screen.

113


Setup Start screen 'Basic settings'

Option 2: Synchronise the system time with an NTP server

► Activate [Activate NTP] checkbox.

> Status LED =

► Enter the IP address of the NTP server in the IP address field.

► Pick the time zone of the NTP server from the list (UTC format).

> The NTP client of the device synchronises the system time with the selected NTP server.

► Wait until status LED =

> [Date] and [Time] show the synchronised values.

► Press [Finish] to save the changes and go to the standard start screen.

114


Setup Update the firmware of the device

>

6.3 Update the firmware of the device 18399

NOTICE

Risk of data loss!

Interrupting a firmware update leads to a loss of the current system and fieldbus settings.

► Secure the device settings before carrying out a firmware update! (→ Save the device configuration (→ page 84))

► Ensure an uninterrupted voltage supply during the firmware update!

To update the firmware of the device:

► Select one of the following options:

Firmware update from SD card (→ page 115)

Firmware update via the web interface (→ page 116) >

6.3.1 Behaviour of the settings upon firmware update 17058

The following settings/data records remain valid upon a firmware update:

Setting / data record Path to the menu page

User language of the GUI [System] > [Setup] > [System settings]

Display settings (screen saver, return) [System] > [Setup] > [System settings]

System time (date/time) [System] > [Setup] > [Clock]

NTP settings [System] > [Setup] > [Clock]

Operating hours counter [System] > [Diagnosis]

AS-i master settings and configuration data [AS-i 1] / [AS-i 2] > [Master setup]

IP parameters of the configuration interface [Interfaces] > [Configuration interface] > [IP-Setup]

Fieldbus settings [Interfaces] > [EtherNet/IP] > [Setup]

The following settings/data records are reinitalised with their default values upon firmware update:

Setting / data record Reset value Path to the menu page

Control of the outputs Gateway [System] > [Setup] > [System settings]

Activate CODESYS PLC deactivated [System] > [Setup] > [System settings]

Device cycle 0.7 ms [System] > [Setup] > [System settings]

OSC Delete system messages Start page > [OSC]

Retain variables 0x00 --

115



>

6.3.2 Firmware update from SD card 18400

Pay attention to notes on memory behaviour (→ Behaviour of the settings upon firmware update (→ page 114))!

>

1 Preparations

► Download the new firmware file from the ifm website.

► Copy the firmware file into the root directory of an SD card.

► Insert the SD card containing the firmware file in the SD card slot (→ SD card slot (→ page 18)). >

2 Start the recovery mode

► Separate the device from the circuit.

► Perform the following actions simultaneously:

Press the left function key and the arrow keys [] and [] simultaneously and keep them pressed (→ picture).

Connect the device to a circuit.

► Keep the keys pressed until the screen [ifm Recovery] appears (approx. 10 s).

>

3 Update the firmware

► Use the arrow keys [] / [] to select the menu item [Install from SD] (→ picture).

► Press [OK] using the left function key.

> The updating process starts.

> The display shows the progress of the firmware update.

> A status message appears once the firmware has been updated successfully.

>

4 Reboot the device

► Use the arrow keys [] / [] to select the [Reboot] button.

► Press [OK] to reboot the device.

> The device reboots with the current firmware.

> The start screen "Basic settings" appears (→ Start screen 'Basic settings' (→ page 111)).

116



>

6.3.3 Firmware update via the web interface 18401

Pay attention to notes on memory behaviour (→ Behaviour of the settings upon firmware update (→ page 114))!

>

1 Preparations

► Download the new firmware file from the ifm website.

► Connect the PC/laptop to the configuration interface (X3) of the device. (→ Configuration interface: connection concepts (→ page 133))

>

2 Start the recovery mode

► Separate the device from the circuit.

► Perform the following actions simultaneously:

Press the left function key and the arrow keys [] and [] simultaneously and keep them pressed (→ picture).

Connect the device to a circuit.

► Keep the keys pressed until the screen [ifm Recovery] appears (approx. 10 s).

>

3 Optional: adjust the IP parameters

► Use the arrow keys [] / [] to select the menu item [Network Setup].

► Press [OK] to go to the network setup.

> The display shows the page [Network Setup] (→ picture).

> The page shows the current IP address of the device.

Option 1: obtain the IP parameters from a DHCP server

► Connect the configuration interface to the DHCP server.

► Use the arrow keys [] / [] to select the menu item [DHCP].

► Press [OK] to activate the DHCP client of the device.

> The device obtains the IP parameters from the DHCP server.

> If not successful, the device will create the IP parameters by means of the Zeroconf protocol.

> The display shows the [Network Setup] page with the new IP address.

► Leave the network setup with [Back].

> The display shows the [ifm Recovery] page.

Option 2: configure the IP parameters manually

117



► Use the arrow keys [] / [] to select the menu item [Manual Setup].

► Activate the manual setup with [OK].

> The display shows the [Static IP setup] page (→ picture)

► Use the arrow keys [] / [] to select the following menu items one after the other and set them as required: – [IP Address] – [Network Mask] – [Default gateway]

► Press [Apply] to save the set values.

> The display shows the [Network Setup] page with the new IP address.

► Leave the network setup with [Back].

> The display shows the [ifm Recovery] page.

>

4 Update the firmware

► Access the web interface of the device.

> The web interface of the recovery mode appears:

► Press the [Search ...] button.

> The file explorer appears.

► Select the firmware file and press [Open].

> The field [Select image to upload] shows the file path and name of the firmware file.

► Press [send] to start the updating process.

> The display and web interface show the progress of the firmware update.

> A status message appears once the firmware has been updated successfully. >

5 Reboot the device

► Click on the tab [Reboot]

> The device reboots with the current firmware.

> The start screen "Basic settings" appears (→ Start screen 'Basic settings' (→ page 111)).

118


Setup Connect and address AS-i slaves

>

6.4 Connect and address AS-i slaves 9004

To integrate AS-i slaves into an AS-i network that is controlled by one of the AS-i masters of the device:

1 Connect and address the AS-i slave

► Connect ONE AS-i slave to be addressed to the requested AS-i network (AS-i 1 or AS-i 2) as described in the corresponding installation instructions.

► Assign the desired address to the AS-i slave (→ Quick setup: Address the AS-i slaves connected to AS-i master 1 (→ page 54) or → Quick setup: Address the AS-i slaves connected to AS-i master 2 (→ page 55)).

► Optional: Repeat step 1 to connect and address further AS-i slaves.

2 Project the AS-i network

► Carry out a projection adaptation on the AS-i master with the newly addressed AS-i slaves (→ Quick setup: Project AS-i networks (→ page 47)).

> The AS-i master adds the detected slaves (LDS) to the list of the projected slaves (LPS).

> The AS-i slaves have a valid address and are integrated in the AS-i network. >

6.5 Setup of EtherNet/IP 12123

Detailed information on how to configure the EtherNet/IP network: → operating instructions of the EtherNet/IP master

To connect the device to the EtherNet/IP network:


Use the top-down configuration mode:→ Configuration mode: Top-down (→ page 336)

Use the independent configuration mode: → Configuration mode: Independent (→ page 341)

Before setting the EtherNet/IP parameters, all slaves must be connected to and addressed in the AS-i network.

► Project the AS-i slaves (→ Connect and address AS-i slaves (→ page 118))

>

6.6 Setup of the configuration interface 9006

To set up the EtherNet configuration interface (X3):

► >


► Set the interface parameters (→ Notes on IP settings (→ page 89)).

119


Setup Exchange AS-i slave

>

6.7 Exchange AS-i slave 10249

AC142n makes it possible to replace an AS-i slave by a new AS-i slave in the operating mode "protected mode".

Requirements:

> The new and the old AS-i slave have the same device profile(→ Profiles of the AS-i slaves (→ page 145)).

> The new AS-i slave has the address 0.

> Parameter [Automat. adressing] is activated (→ Set the monitoring functions of the AS-i master (→ page 58)).

1 Remove old AS-i slave

► Disconnect the AS-i slave to be replaced from the AS-i network

> AC142n detects a configuration error and generates a corresponding OSC message.

2 Install new AS-i slave

► Connect the new AS-i slave to the AS-i network.

> AC142n detects the new AS-i slave and automatically assigns the address of the old AS-i slave.

> The OSC error message disappears.

> The new AS-i slave is operational.

120


Troubleshooting Exchange AS-i slave

7 Troubleshooting

Status LED ...........................................................................................................................................121 Online diagnosis function .....................................................................................................................122 Online Support Center (OSC) ..............................................................................................................123

7288

This chapter offers information regarding fault detection and troubleshooting.

121


Troubleshooting Status LED

>

7.1 Status LED 7094

The status LEDs of the device provide information about the current state of system components.

Position of the status LED on device: → Where is what on the AS-i device? (→ page 16)

>

7.1.1 Status LED: Basic device 6950

Status LED Description

H1 green lights Device has started, warnings or error messages.

yellow flashes 0.5 Hz There is a warning but not an error message.

red flashes 2Hz There is an error message.

>

7.1.2 Status LED: fieldbus EtherNet/IP 12115

Status LED Description

H2 yellow off no data transmission

flashes Reception of data

H3 green off no physical connection

lights Physical connection OK

H4 yellow off no data transmission

flashes Reception of data

H5 green off no physical connection

lights Physical connection OK

122


Troubleshooting Online diagnosis function

>

7.2 Online diagnosis function 7055

The device offers an online diagnosis function. It helps the user to find and eliminate the source of occuring failures and errors. >

7.2.1 Message types 18986

The online diagnostic function of AC142n distinguishes 3 types of messages:

Symbol Message type Meaning

Error An error occurred; proper operation of the device is disturbed.

User action absolutely required

Warning An irregularity has occurred

User action required

Event An uncritical event has occurred

No user action required

>

7.2.2 Locate error sources 7063

The online diagnosis function helps the operator to locate the source of ooccuring warning and error messages. The menu symbols of the navigation path leading to the menu page, which generates a message, are overlain by a warning / error symbol. Thus, the operator can easily locate the error source.

Example:

> The following menu symbols are overlain by an error symbol:

Main navigation bar: [AS-i 1]

Sub navigation bar: [Slaves]

> Error source on menu page [AS-i 1] > [Slaves]

If a function unit of the device causes a warning and an error message at the same time, then the error symbol is displayed.

123


Troubleshooting Online Support Center (OSC)

>

7.3 Online Support Center (OSC) 7058

The Online Support Center (OSC) displays detailed information about occuring events, failures and errors.

The OSC has the following appearance:

List to select a filter and name of the selected filter

Message An message consists of error symbol, timestamp and detailed information about the errors

Number of the message displayed and total number of messages

Tabs to select a view [Current]: → OSC: View current error messages (→ page 124) [History]: → OSC: Show message history (→ page 125)

124



>

7.3.1 OSC: View current error messages 15842

The [Current] tab lists all current messages. The messages are in chronological order. All messages regarding warnings and errors are displayd.

Information about the different types of messages: → Message types (→ page 122)

Overview of possible OSC messages of the device: → OSC messages (→ page 345)

To view the error messages that are currently active:


►

► Select [Current] tab.

2 Show current messages

> The page shows the error messages that are currently active.

► Press [] to select the message field.


► Use []/[] to go through the error messages.

3 Optional: filter messages



[Filter] System component the message was created in

All = Display all messages in chronological order of their occurrence (= preset).

AS-i 1 = Display messages that were created in AS-i master 1.

AS-i 2 = Display messages that were created in AS-i master 2 (only selectable for devices with 2 AS-i masters).

System = Display messages that were created in the system.

> Page shows filtered messages.

125



>

7.3.2 OSC: Show message history 11775

The [History] tab lists all messages which occurred during the operating time of the device. The messages are shown in chronological order. The device displays messages regarding events, warnings and errors.

The messages are stored in a ring buffer. The ring buffer can store 2000 messages. If full, the device overwrites the oldest message(s) (time stamp).

There is a message pair for each failure (warning, error). It indicates the time of occurrence of the failure and the time at which the cause of the failure was rectified. The symbols of the messages are correspondingly marked.

Example: Error message

= Time at which the error occurred

= Time at which the cause of the fault was rectified.

To display the history of messages created so far again:

1 Select menu page

► On the start screen: Select [OSC].

► Select [History] tab.

2 Display all messages

> The page shows all previously generated error messages.

► Press [] to select the message field.


► Use []/[] to go through the error messages.

3 Optional: Filter messages



[Filter] System component the message was created in

All = Display all messages in chronological order of their occurrence (= preset).

AS-i 1 = Display messages that were created in AS-i master 1.

AS-i 2 = Display messages that were created in AS-i master 2 (only selectable for devices with 2 AS-i masters).

System = Display messages that were created in the system.

> Page shows filtered messages.

126


Appendix Online Support Center (OSC)

8 Appendix

Approval tests / certifications ................................................................................................................127 Technical data ......................................................................................................................................128 Address assignment in Ethernet networks ...........................................................................................132 Configuration interface: connection concepts ......................................................................................133 AS-i master ...........................................................................................................................................136 AS-i slaves ............................................................................................................................................144 Fieldbus EtherNet/IP ............................................................................................................................155 OSC messages ....................................................................................................................................345 Information on AS-i ...............................................................................................................................348

7156

127


Appendix Approval tests / certifications

>

8.1 Approval tests / certifications 12555

Software-relevant certifications:

AS-i master profile M4 according to AS-i specification 3.0

Fieldbus certification: conform to EtherNet/IP specification

128


Appendix Technical data

>

8.2 Technical data

Housing.................................................................................................................................................129 Display elements ..................................................................................................................................129 Operation ..............................................................................................................................................129 Power supply connections ....................................................................................................................129 Interfaces ..............................................................................................................................................130 Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) .................................................................................................131

9011

129



>

8.2.1 Housing 9044

Housing

Degrees of protection IP20

Material Aluminium, steel sheet, Makrolon

Dimensions (W x H x D) [mm] 93 x 128,2 x 106,2

>

8.2.2 Display elements 9045

Display

Technology LCD, colour

Size 35 x 28 mm (1.8“)

Resolution 220 x 176 pixels

Colour depth 18 bits (= 262 144 possible colours)

LED

Possible colours red, green, yellow

>

8.2.3 Operation 9046

Membrane keys

Function keys 2x

Navigation keys / arrow keys 4x

>

8.2.4 Power supply connections 9047

Versorgungsanschlüsse

AS-i 1, AS-i 2, FE plug-in, 6 poles, Combicon

24 V Spannungsversorgung plug-in, 2 poles, Combicon

130



>

8.2.5 Interfaces 11070

EtherNet configuration interface

Connection 1x RJ45

Transmission 10/100 Mbits/s

Protocol HTTP, FTP, Telnet

Designation X3

12556

EtherNet fieldbus interface

Connection 2x RJ45

Transmission rate 10/100 Mbits/s

Transfer times PLC disabled: 0.7 ms

PLC enabled: 1.5 ... 3.0 ms (adjustable)

Jitter 0.7 ms

Protocol EtherNet/IP

Services and data Cyclic EtherNet/IP services incl. diagnostic data

Acyclic EtherNet/IP services incl. AS-i command channel

EDS file

Switch integrated 2-port switch (iRT capable)

Designation X6 (EtherNet/IP port 2)

X7 (EtherNet/IP port 1)

11072

SD card slot

Media SD memory cards (max. 32 Gbytes)

Format SDHC format is supported

Supported file formats FAT, FAT32

131



>

8.2.6 Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) 14849

Programmable Logic Controller (PLC)

Type CODESYS Control Runtime System (incl. CODESYS WebVisu)

Programming system CODESYS Development System (from version 3.5 SP4 patch 2)

Programming languages FBD, SFC, CFC, IL, LD, ST

Available memory for PLC applications / RETAIN variables

approx. 10 MB / 4072 bytes

132


Appendix Address assignment in Ethernet networks

>

8.3 Address assignment in Ethernet networks 14436

In the Ethernet network every IP address MUST be unique.

The following IP addresses are reserved for network-internal purposes and are therefore not allowed as an address for participants: nnn.nnn.nnn.0 | nnn.nnn.nnn.255.

Only network participants whose subnet mask is identical and whose IP addresses are identical with respect to the subnet mask can communicate with each other.

Rule: If part of the subnet mask = 255, the corresponding IP address parts must be identical. If part of the subnet mask = 0, the corresponding IP address parts must be different.

If the subnet mask = 255.255.255.0, 254 participants communicating with each other are possible in the network. If the subnet mask = 255.255.0.0, 256x254 = 65 024 participants communicating with each other are possible in the network.

In the same physical network different subnet masks of the participants are allowed. They form different groups of participants which cannot communicate with groups of participants having other subnet masks.

In case of doubt or problems please contact your system administrator.

Examples:

Participant A IP address

Participant A Subnet mask

Participant B IP address

Participant B Subnet mask

Communication of participants possible?

192.168.82.247 255.255.255.0 192.168.82.10 255.255.255.0 Yes, 254 participants possible

192.168.82.247 255.255.255.0 192.168.82.247 255.255.255.0 No (same IP address)

192.168.82.247 255.255.255.0 192.168.82.10 255.255.0.0 No (different subnet mask)

192.168.82.247 255.255.255.0 192.168.116.10 255.255.255.0 No (different IP address range: 82 vs. 116)

192.168.222.213 255.255.0.0 192.168.222.123 255.255.0.0 Yes, 65 024 participants possible

192.168.111.213 255.255.0.0 192.168.222.123 255.255.0.0 Yes, 65 024 participants possible

192.168.82.247 255.255.255.0 192.168.82.0 255.255.255.0 no; the whole network is disturbed because the IP address xxx.xxx.xxx.0 is not allowed

133


Appendix Configuration interface: connection concepts

>

8.4 Configuration interface: connection concepts

Direct link ..............................................................................................................................................134 Connection via Ethernet network .........................................................................................................135

7071

To be able to access the web interface and the programming interface of the device-internal PLC, the configuration interface (X3) must be connected to a computer. The device supports the following connection types:

Direct connection (→ Direct link (→ page 134))

Connection via an EtherNet network (→ Connection via Ethernet network (→ page 135))

134



>

8.4.1 Direct link 12551

To establish a direct connection to the device:

► Connect configuration interface X3 of the device with the Ethernet interface of the PC/laptop.

► Setup the IP parameters of the configuration interface (X3) to enable communication between the device and the PC/Laptop. → Notes on IP settings (→ page 89) → Address assignment in Ethernet networks (→ page 132)

> Connection bewtween device and PC/Laptop is established.

135



>

8.4.2 Connection via Ethernet network 12553

To establish a connection via a Ethernet network, the device has to be connected with a coupling element (e.g. Ethernet switch, WLAN router). >

Option 1: Transmit fieldbus and web interface data via different networks 14182

► Enable DHCP functionality of the Ethernet switch/WLAN router.

► Connect configuration interface (X3) via Ethernet cable with the Ethernet switch/WLAN router (

► Activate [Optain IP address autom.] (→ Notes on IP settings (→ page 89)).

► If required, activate the option 'Obtain an IP address automatically' in the IP settings of the PC.

► Connect PC/laptop with the Ethernet switch.

OR:

► Connect PC/laptop wireless with the WLAN router .

> Connection between device and PC/laptop is established.

>

Option 2: transfer fieldbus and web interface data over the same network 14183

► Connect the configuration interface (X3) to the EtherNet/IP interface (X7) using an EtherNet cable.

► Activate the DHCP function of the EtherNet switch for automatic assignment of IP addresses.

► Connect the EtherNet/IP interface (X6) to the EtherNet switch using an EtherNet cable.

► The parameter [Optain IP address autom.] must be activated (→ Notes on IP settings (→ page 89)).

► Connect the PC/laptop to the EtherNet switch using an EtherNet cable.

► If necessary, activate the option [Optain IP address automatically] in the IP settings of the PC/laptop.

> The device and the PC/laptop/mobile device are connected over the IP network.

136


Appendix AS-i master

>

8.5 AS-i master

Operating modes of the AS-i master ....................................................................................................137 Master flags ..........................................................................................................................................139

8900

Master = Handles the complete organisation on the bus. The master decides on the bus access time and polls the →slaves cyclically.

137



>

8.5.1 Operating modes of the AS-i master

Protected mode ....................................................................................................................................138 Projection mode ....................................................................................................................................138 Switch operating modes .......................................................................................................................138

8934

The AS-i master can be operated in one of the following operating modes:

138



>

Protected mode 14833

In the operating mode "Protected mode" (= normal mode), the AS-i master only communicates with AS-i slaves that are entered in the list of projected slaves (LPS) and where current and target configuration match.

The AS-i master automatically detects the following actions and signals a configuration error:

an AS-i slave is added to the AS-i network (error message: Slave not projected)

an AS-i slave is removed from the AS-i network (error message: Slave not present)

Optionally, the operator can activate/deactivate the following monitoring functions (→ Set the monitoring functions of the AS-i master (→ page 58)):

Automatic addressing: When a defective slave is replaced, the AS-i master controls the addressing. The new AS-i slave obtains the same address as the old AS-i slave if the following conditions are met:

The new AS-i slave has the address 0.

Both AS-i slaves have the same device profile.

Double address recognition: The AS-i master recognises whether one or several AS-i slaves have the same address (error message: Double address error).

Earth-fault detection: The AS-i master detects any earth faults.

In the operating mode "Protected mode", the operator can control the PLC applications stored on the device (start, stop, reset). >

Projection mode 14848

In the operating mode "Projection mode", the AS-i master communicates with all AS-i slaves that are connected to the AS-i line and do not have the address 0. Missing AS-i slaves are not detected by the AS-i master.

In projection mode a projection adaptation can be carried out. The AS-i master reads the configuration data of all detected AS-i slaves and saves it permanently. >

Switch operating modes 5487

The operator / programmer can switch the operating modes of the AS-i master as follows:

per GUI / web interface (→ Set the operating mode of the AS-i master (→ page 57))

per function block Set_Mode (programming manual: → Set_Mode)

If an AS-i slave with the address 0 is connected, then the AS-i master cannot switch from "projection mode" into "protected mode" !

► Address the AS-i slave correctly.

► Switch the operating mode.

139



>

8.5.2 Master flags

AS-i master status flags ........................................................................................................................140 Execution control flags .........................................................................................................................141 Host flags ..............................................................................................................................................142 DAE/EE flags ........................................................................................................................................143

16936

The master flags contain information about the status of the AS-i master and the fieldbus host.

The master flags are transmitted along with the input data of the digital AS-i slaves in the acyclic data set DS2 (→ DS2 – Digital inputs of the slaves and master flags (→ page 223)).

140



>

AS-i master status flags 7160

The AS-i master status flags provide information about the status of the AS-i master. After a status change, the AS-i master immediately updates the flags.

The AS-i master status flags are saved in the following register:

AS-i master status flags

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

ECPS ECP – – WCD CM – HWDT SER HER

Legend:

Flag Designation Description Initial value at power-on

HER Hardware Error 1 (TRUE): a hardware error occurred during the power-on self test

0 (FALSE)

SER Software Error 1 (TRUE): Software error occurred: Stack Overflow, Stack Underflow, Undefined Opcode, Instruction Fault, Illegal Access, Watchdog Timeout

0 (FALSE)

HWDT Host Watchdog Timeout

1 (TRUE): Host watchdog not triggered by the host within 200 ms; master changed to the offline mode

0 (FALSE)

CM Configuration Missing 1 (TRUE): Configuration not yet fully received from the host. Becomes FALSE as soon as PCD, PP and LPS have been set

1 (TRUE)

WCD Watchdog Control Disabled

1 (TRUE): Signals the host that the watchdog signal is not processed in the master.

0 (FALSE)

ECP Execution Control Phase

Display of the different phases the execution control goes through during boot (→ table).

0

ECPS Execution Control Phase State

Display of the substates of the different execution control phases (→ table).

0

Execution Control Phase Execution Control Phase State

0 = inactive –

1 = start phase 0 = master start and initialisation 1 = wait for configuration 2 = wait for start

2 = reserved –

3 = offline phase –

4 = detection phase –

5 = activation phase –

6 = normal operation 0 = normal data exchange 1 = slave finder activated

141



>

Execution control flags 7161

The execution control flags provide information about the execution control of the AS-i master. The flags are updated by the AS-i master immediately after each change.

The execution control flags are saved in the following register:

Execution control flags

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

– NOPF CCOK PE – DEA AAE POK OR APF NOA CA AA AN S0 COK

Legend:


COK Config_OK 1 (TRUE): The configuration of all AS-i slaves on the network corresponds to the projection data (CDI=PCD for all activated slaves) && (LDS=LPS=LAS) Exception: Flag APF = 1 and LPS = empty, then COK = 1

0 (FALSE)

S0 LDS.0 1 (TRUE): Slave with address 0 found 0 (FALSE)

AN Auto_Address_Assign 1 (TRUE): Auto addressing possible (protected mode = active && auto addressing = active && PCD = CDI &&

LDS <=LPS)

0 (FALSE)

AA Auto_Address_Available 1 (TRUE): All the necessary conditions for auto addressing are fulfilled. The master waits for slave 0.

0 (FALSE)

CA Configuration_Active 0 (FALSE): 1 (TRUE):

Master in protected mode Master in projection mode

0 (FALSE)

NOA Normal_Operation_Active 1 (TRUE): Master is in the normal mode (The AS-i master has communicated with at least one slave since the last offline phase. Even if the slave disappears after this, the signal will remain set.)

0 (FALSE)

APF Asi_Power_Fail 0 (FALSE): 1 (TRUE):

AS-i voltage OK AS-i voltage too low

1 (TRUE)

OR Offline_Ready 1 (TRUE): Master has gone through the offline phase and waits for: APF = 0 and a timeout of 1s

0 (FALSE)

POK Periphery_OK 1 (TRUE): No peripheral faults present, all bits of LPF = 0.

0 (FALSE)

AAE Auto_Address_Enable 1 (TRUE): Auto addressing switched on (Echo of Set_Auto_Address_Enable of host)

0 (FALSE)

DEA Data_Exchange_Active 1 (TRUE): Data exchange between master and slaves activated (reflects DEA of host flags)

1 (TRUE)

0 (FALSE): Instead of the data exchange, ReadID is continually executed on the slaves.

PE Protocol Error 1 (TRUE): 0 (FALSE):

CTT protocol error No CTT protocol error

0 (FALSE)

142




CCOK CTT_Config_OK 1 (TRUE): The configuration of all CTT slaves on the network corresponds to the projected CCT data. (CCDI = PCCD for all CTT slaves)

0 (FALSE)

NOPF No_Offline_Phase_Flag 1 (TRUE): The master skips the offline phase if one of the following actions is performed: – change to protected mode – change of PCD – change of LPS – change of PCCD

0 (FALSE)

0 (FALSE): The master goes through the offline phase when changing to the protected mode the next time.

>

Host flags 7162

The host flags are regularly updated by the host. The AS-i master cyclically checks the host flags for changes.

The host flags are saved in the following register:

Host Flags

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

– – – – – – – – – – – – – – DEA OFF

Legend:


OFF Offline 1 (TRUE): Execution control of the master changes to the offline mode. The function Set_Offline_Mode() is implemented via this flag.

0 (FALSE)

DEA Data_Exchange_Active 1 (TRUE): Data exchange activated between master and slaves. The function Set_Data_Exchange_Active() is implemented via this flag

1 (TRUE)

143



>

DAE/EE flags 16935

The DAE/EE flags indicate if the double address detection and the earth fault detection are on.

The DEA/EE flags are saved in the following register:

DAE/EE flags

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- DAE active

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- EE active

Legend:

Flag Designation Description Initial value at PowerOn

DAE active

Double address detection active

1 (TRUE): 0 (FALSE):

Double address detection is on. Double address detection is off.

0 (FALSE)

EE active Earth fault detection is active

1 (TRUE): 0 (FALSE):

Earth fault detection is on. Earth fault detection is off.

1 (TRUE)

144


Appendix AS-i slaves

>

8.6 AS-i slaves

Profiles of AS-i slaves ...........................................................................................................................145 8893

Slave = Passive participant on the bus, only replies on request of the →master. Slaves have a clearly defined and unique →address in the bus.

145



>

8.6.1 Profiles of AS-i slaves

Configuration data (CDI) of the slaves (slave profiles) .........................................................................146 Slave profiles for slaves with combined transaction .............................................................................153 Combined transaction – Use of analogue channels in the gateway depending on the slave profile ...153

8902

146



>

Configuration data (CDI) of the slaves (slave profiles)

Structure of the slave profile .................................................................................................................147 Description of the IO code for digital slaves .........................................................................................147 Description of the ID code (selection) ..................................................................................................148 Description of the extended ID code 1 .................................................................................................148 Description of the extended ID code 2 .................................................................................................149 Valid combinations IO code / ID code / extended ID code 2 ................................................................150

5346

The configuration data CDI (= Configuration Data Image) for single, A and B slaves is stored in a data word. The structure is shown below and is the same for all slaves.

147



>

Structure of the slave profile 5347

The slave profile has the following structure: S-[IO code].[ID code].[ext. ID code2]

Bits 15...12 Bits 11...8 Bits 7...4 Bits 3...0

XID2 extended ID code 2

3rd figure in the slave profile

(AS-i slave v2.0 = 0xF *)

XID1 extended ID code 1

is no part of the slave profile

can be changed by the user

(AS-i slave v2.0 = 0xF *)

ID code ID code

2nd figure in the slave profile

IO code I/O configuration

1st figure in the slave profile

Example: AC2255 4 digital inputs, 2 digital outputs AS-i profile = S-7.A.E This results in the following configuration data of the slave:

0b1110 = 0xE (e.g.) 0b0111 = 0x7 0b1010 = 0xA 0b0111 = 0x7

The corresponding CDI data word is: 11100111 10100111 = 0xE7A7

*) AS-i slaves according to the AS-i specification 2.0 and older do not support the extended ID codes 1 and 2. In the master 0xF is stored for this configuration data. >

Description of the IO code for digital slaves 5349

Structure slave profile = S-[IO-Code].x.x

IO code [hex]

IO code (bits 3…0)

Function of the periphery bit

D3 D2 D1 D0

0 0000 input input input input

1 0001 output input input input

2 0010 input / output input input input

3 0011 output output input input

4 0100 input / output input / output input input

5 0101 output output output input

6 0110 input / output input / output input / output input

7 0111 input / output input / output input / output input / output

8 1000 output output output output

9 1001 input output output output

A 1010 input / output output output output

B 1011 input input output output

C 1100 input / output input / output output output

D 1101 input input input output

E 1110 input / output input / output input / output output

F 1111 not allowed

148



>

Description of the ID code (selection) 5351

Structure slave profile = S-x.[ID-Code].x

ID code [hex]

ID code (Bits 3…0)

Description

0 0000 4 I/O connections for binary sensors and/or actuators with 1 signal each

1 0001 2 dual-signal I/O connections for binary sensors and/or actuators with 2 signals each

A 1010 slave operates in the extended addressing mode (B slave or A/B slave)

B 1011 slave corresponds to Safety-at-Work

F 1111 manufacturer-specific device (cannot be replaced with products from other manufacturers)

>

Description of the extended ID code 1 5353

Can be changed by the user, however not a part of the slave profile.

Default value: 0xF for single slaves 0x7 for A/B slaves

The value is evaluated and checked by the master. The user can make an additional distinction between slaves which do not differ in the AS-i system, e.g. slaves with different ranges for current, voltage or frequency. This prevents damage when replacing slaves with a wrong performance range.

149



>

Description of the extended ID code 2 5355

>

Extended ID code 2 for analogue slaves with profile 7.3.x 5357

The extended ID code 2 is used to specify complex slaves.

Structure slave profile = S-7.3.[ext.ID code2]

Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Description

0 0 1-channel slave

0 1 2-channel slave

1 0 4-channel slave

1 1 4-channel slave (if slave has no extended ID code)

0 transparent data exchange = binary bits

1 analogue value transmission

0 output slave

1 input slave

The ID code 2 results from a combination of the options stated above. >

Extended ID code 2 for analogue slaves with profile 7.4.x 5358

The extended ID code 2 is used to specify complex slaves.

Structure slave profile = S-7.3.[ext. ID code2]

Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Description

0 0 1-channel slave

0 1 2-channel slave

1 0 4-channel slave

1 1 4-channel slave (if slave has no extended ID code)

0 0 0 0 4 binary inputs + 4 binary outputs

0 output slave

1 input slave

The ID code 2 results from a combination of the options stated above.

150



>

Valid combinations IO code / ID code / extended ID code 2 5359

Structure slave profile = S-[IO code].[ID code].[ext. ID code2]

IO code [hex]

ID code [hex]

Ext. ID code 2

[hex] Meaning

0…E not: 9, B, D

0 x binary I/O connections for sensors and actuators

0, 3, 8 1 x 1 or 2 binary sensors or actuators with 2 signals each (dual-signal devices)

0 1 x 4 binary inputs for 2 dual-signal sensors

0…E not: 2A

A x slave operates in the "extended addressing mode" (B slave or A/B slave)

0 A E slave with extended address function: 4 binary inputs for 2 dual-signal sensors (e.g. I/O module AC2250)

0 B x slave corresponds to Safety-at-Work

0…E F x manufacturer-specific device (cannot be replaced by other products)

1 1 x single sensor with remote setting: 3 binary inputs + 1 binary output (e.g. sensor OC5226)

3 1 x 2 binary inputs for 1 dual-signal sensor AND 2 binary outputs for 1 dual-signal actuator

3 A x slave with extended address function

3 A 1 slave with extended address function: 2 binary inputs + 1 binary output

3 A 2 slave with extended address function: 4 binary inputs

6 0 x quick combined transaction type 5 of 8, 12 or 16 data bits by using 2, 3 or 4 slave addresses in a slave

7 0 F motor starter 2I + 2O (e.g. ZB0032)

7 0 E 4 binary inputs + 4 binary outputs (e.g. I/O module AC2251)

7 1 x interface for the transmission of 6...18-bit signals; analogue profile for combined transaction type 1; was replaced by S-7.3

7 2 x extended slave profile for the transmission of 6...18-bit signals; extended analogue profile for combined transaction type 1; was replaced by S-7.4

7 3 x

slave profile for 16-bit transmission with integrated support in the master; integrated analogue profile for combined transaction type 1

( Extended ID code 2 for analogue slaves with profile 7.3.x (→ page 149))

7 3 5 2 analogue outputs of 16 bits each (e.g. I/O module AC2618)

7 3 6 4 analogue outputs of 16 bits each (e.g. I/O module AC2518)

7 3 C 1 analogue input of 16 bits (e.g. sensor PPA020)

7 3 D 2 analogue inputs of 16 bits each (e.g. I/O module AC2616)

7 3 E 4 analogue inputs of 16 bits each (e.g. I/O module AC2516)

7 4 x

extended slave profile for 16-bit transmission with integrated support in the master; integrated extended analogue profile for combined transaction type 1

( Extended ID code 2 for analogue slaves with profile 7.4.x (→ page 149))

7 4 C RFID identification system for writing and reading RFID tags 15-bit data + 1-bit messages (e.g. DTA100)

151



IO code [hex]

ID code [hex]

Ext. ID code 2

[hex] Meaning

7 A x slave operates in the "extended addressing mode" (B slave or A/B slave)

7 A 5 slave operates in the "extended addressing mode" (B slave or A/B slave) combined slave; supports combined transaction type 2

7 A 7 slave operates in the "extended addressing mode" (B slave or A/B slave) 4 binary inputs + 4 binary outputs

7 A 8 slave operates in the "extended addressing mode" (B slave or A/B slave) 1 channel for combined transaction type 4

7 A 9 slave operates in the "extended addressing mode" (B slave or A/B slave) dual channel for combined transaction type 4

7 A A slave operates in the "extended addressing mode" (B slave or A/B slave) 8 binary inputs + 8 binary outputs

7 A E slave operates in the "extended addressing mode" (B slave or A/B slave); dual sensor with actuator interface (e.g. sensor AC2317); 2 binary inputs + 2 binary outputs

7 B x safety slave with non-safe outputs

7 B 0 safety slave with non-safe outputs; 2 safe binary inputs (e.g. I/O module AC005S)

7 B E

safety sensor with non-safe outputs; 2 safe binary inputs AND 2 safe binary outputs AND 2 non-safe (relay) outputs (e.g. I/O module AC009S)

7 D x device for motor control (electromechanical)

7 D 0 electromechanical motor control with open sub-profile

7 D 1 electromechanical direct starter

7 D 2 electromechanical reverser

7 D 3 electromechanical direct starter with brake

7 D 4 electromechanical reverser with brake

7 D 5 electromechanical direct starter with accessories

7 D 6 electromechanical reverser with accessories

7 E x device for motor control (electronic)

7 E 0 electronic motor control with open sub-profile

7 E 1 electronic direct starter

7 E 2 electronic reverser

7 E 3 electronic direct starter with brake

7 E 4 electronic reverser with brake

7 E 5 electronic direct starter with accessories

7 E 6 electronic reverser with accessories

8 1 x 4 binary outputs for 2 dual-signal actuators

B 1 x dual-signal actuator with feedback: 2 binary outputs + 2 binary inputs

B A 5 slave operates in the "extended addressing mode" (B slave or A/B slave); supports combined transaction type 2

B A E slave operates in the "extended addressing mode" (B slave or A/B slave); 2 binary outputs + 2 binary inputs (e.g. AC2086 module)

152



IO code [hex]

ID code [hex]

Ext. ID code 2

[hex] Meaning

D 1 x single actuator with monitoring: 1 binary output + 3 binary inputs

x = any value (0...F)

Devices with M4 master profile enable connection of slaves with more than 4 digital inputs/outputs. The transmission is combined: Part of the data transmission is carried out via the digital bits D0...D3, another part via the "analogue" channels.

The more data is transmitted, the longer it takes until all data of a slave has been transmitted.

Cycle time single slave = 5 ms Cycle time A/B slave (if address is only assigned to A or B slave) = 5 ms Cycle time A/B slave (if address is assigned to A and B slave) = 10 ms The cycle time for CTT transmission is a multiple of these values for individual data.

CTT = Combined Transaction Type

153



>

Slave profiles for slaves with combined transaction 5362

Structure slave profile = S-[IO-Code].[ID-Code].[ext.ID-Code2]

Slave profile

Master profile

Assignment analogue channels in the device

Bits D0…D3

Additional acyclic string

data transaction

Combined transaction

CTT

Number of channels

Use analogue / digital

S-6.0 M4 1 I

and 1 O

2/3/4 x 4 binary inputs and

2/3/4 x 4 binary outputs –– no type 5

S-7.3 M3 1/2/4 I

or 1/2/4 O

1/2/4 analogue inputs or

1/2/4 binary outputs –– no type 1

S-7.4 M3 1/2/4 I

or 1/2/4 O

1/2/4 analogue inputs or

1/2/4 binary outputs

4 inputs or

4 outputs yes type 1

S-7.5.5 M4 0…4 I and

0…4 O

0…4 analogue inputs or

< 65 binary inputs and

0…4 analogue outputs or

< 65 binary outputs

2 inputs and

2 outputs yes type 2

S-7.A.5 M4 0…2 I and

0…2 O




< 33 binary outputs

2 inputs and

1 output yes type 2

S-7.A.7 M4 –– –– 4 inputs

and 4 outputs

no type 3

S-7.A.8 M4

1 I

1 analogue input or

< 17 binary inputs 1 output no type 4

S-7.A.9 M4

2 I

2 analogue inputs or

< 33 binary inputs –– no type 4

S-7.A.A M4 1 I

and 1 O

8 binary inputs and

8 binary outputs –– no type 3

S-B.A.5 M4 0…2 I and

0…2 O




< 33 binary outputs

–– yes type 2

Legend colour pattern:

binary inputs binary outputs analogue inputs analogue outputs

>

Combined transaction – Use of analogue channels in the gateway depending on the slave profile 5366

154



Transaction Slave profile

Slave type

Number channel

s

Analogue input channels Analogue output channels

CH3 CH2 CH1 CH0 Trans CH3 CH2 CH1 CH0 Trans

CTT5 6.0.x S 1 – – – b – – – – b –

CTT1

7.3.C S 1 – – – a – – – – – –

7.3.D S 2 – – a a – – – – – –

7.3.E S 4 a a a a – – – – – –

7.3.4 S 1 – – – – – – – – a –

7.3.5 S 2 – – – – – – – a a –

7.3.6 S 4 – – – – – a a a a –

7.3.C S 1 – – – a – – – – – –

7.3.D S 2 – – a a – – – – – –

7.3.E S 4 a a a a – – – – – –

7.3.4 S 1 – – – – – – – – a –

7.3.5 S 2 – – – – – – – a a –

7.3.6 S 4 – – – – – a a a a –

CTT1

7.4.4 S 1 – – – – – – – – a X

7.4.5 S 2 – – – – – – – a a X

7.4.6 S 4 – – – – – a a a a X

7.4.C S 1 – – – a X – – – – –

7.4.D S 2 – – a a X – – – – –

7.4.E S 4 a a a a X – – – – –

CTT2 7.5.5 S 0…4 a b a b a b a b X a b a b a b a b X

CTT2 7.A.5 A 0…2 – – a b a b X – – a b a b X

7.A.5 B 0…2 a b a b – – X a b a b – – X

CTT3 7.A.7 A –

only binary –

only binary –

B – – –

CTT4 7.A.8 A 1 – – – a b – – – – – –

B 1 – a b – – – – – – – –

CTT4 7.A.9 A 2 – – a b a b – – – – – –

B 2 a b a b – – – – – – – –

CTT3 7.A.A A 1 – – – b – – – – b –

B 1 – b – – – – b – – –

CTT2 B.A.5 A 0…2 – – a b a b X – – a b a b X

B.A.5 B 0…2 a b a b – – X a b a b – – X

CHn = channel Trans. = transparent mode

S = single slave A = A slave B = B slave

a = analogue inputs/outputs (word) b = binary inputs/outputs (bits) – = not used

X = additional acyclic transaction of strings for device, parameters, diagnosis

Legend colour pattern:

binary inputs binary outputs analogue inputs analogue outputs

155


Appendix Fieldbus EtherNet/IP

>

8.7 Fieldbus EtherNet/IP

Fieldbus objects ....................................................................................................................................156 Fieldbus parameters .............................................................................................................................158 Device-specific parameters ..................................................................................................................159 Cyclic data ............................................................................................................................................181 Acyclic data ..........................................................................................................................................217 Configuration mode ..............................................................................................................................335

13070

The Ethernet Industrial Protocol (EtherNet/IP) is a fieldbus system for industrial process communication in the automation technology. It extends the Ethernet standard by the object-oriented Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) as application layer.

The following tables shows the main features of the EtherNet/IP:

Topology star, tree, line

Recommendation: Switched Ethernet

Connection technology Standard Ethernet cable and connector

Screened 10/100 Mbit/s TX Ethernet cable

RJ45, M12

Transmission rate 10, 100 MBits

Transmission modes cyclic and acyclic

→ www.odva.org (umbrella organisation)

http://www.odva.org/

156



>

8.7.1 Fieldbus objects 12947

EtherNet/IP is based on the Common Industrial Protocol (CIP). CIP encloses services and applications in so-called object classes. Each object class has certain features (attributes) and defined interfaces which can be used to access the functions of the object instance.

The AC142n uses the following object classes:

Assembly instance objects for the transmission of

device and EtherNet/IP parameters (→ Parameter data (→ page 156))

Cyclic process data, diagnostic data (→ Cyclic data (→ page 156))

Manufacturer-specific objects for the transmission of acyclic data (→ Acyclic data (→ page 157)) >

Parameter data 12620

The paramater data is transfered via the Configuration Assembly Object:

Object class [dec]

Instance [dec]

Attribute [dec]

Content Access r = read w = write

max. no. of words

4 175 3 Parameter data (module configuration, device-specific parameters) r/w 122

>

157



Cyclic data 17451

Cyclic data is transferred in dynamic assembly objects:

Object class [dec]

Instance [dec]

Attribute [dec]


max. no. of words

4 100 3 Cyclic data from AC142n to the I/O scanner (EtherNet/IP slots 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 10, 13, 14)

r max. 248

4 150 3 Cyclic data from the I/O scanner to AC142n (EtherNet/IP slots 2, 4, 6, 8, 11, 12, 15)

r/w max. 248

>

Acyclic data 17548

Acyclic data is transferred in manufacturer-specific objects:

Object class [dec]

Instance [dec]

Attribute [dec]


max. no. of words

801 1 1 Acyclic data sets (system) r 248

32 ... 47 Acyclic data sets (AS-i master 1) r/w* 248

64 ... 79 Acyclic data sets (AS-i master 2) r/w* 248

801 1 30 Command request channel, system r/w 248

31 Command reply channel, system r 248

801 1 62 Command request channel, AS-i master 1 r/w 248

63 Command reply channel, AS-i master 1 r 248

801 1 94 Command request channel, AS-i master 2 r/w 248

95 Command reply channel, AS-i master 2 r 248

* ... depends on acyclic data set (→ Overview: Acyclic data sets (→ page 221))

158



>

8.7.2 Fieldbus parameters 17999

The fieldbus parameters provide information for the integration of the device into the EtherNet/IP network. The fieldbus parameters are set directly on the device.

Parameter Meaning Value range

IP address IP address (IPv4) of the device's EtherNet/IP interface

e.g.: 192.168.0.200

Subnet mask Subnet mask of the EtherNet/IP network segment

e.g.: 255.255.255.0

Gateway address IP address (IPv4) of the EtherNet/IP gateway

e.g.: 192.168.0.100

159



>

8.7.3 Device-specific parameters

Parameters: Independent mode ...........................................................................................................160 Parameters: Top-down mode ...............................................................................................................161 Parameter setting via the configuration assembly object .....................................................................163 EDS-file.................................................................................................................................................180

12788

The device-specific parameters allow you to make individual adjustments to the system. Depending on the selected configuration mode, the following parameters are available.

160



>

Parameters: Independent mode 11058

Parameter Description Value range

Analogue channels per input slave Number of analogue channels per input slave

4 channels* = 4 channels (variable slave assignment)

2 channels = 2 channels (fixed slave assignment)

1 channel = 1 channel (fixed slave assignment)

1 channel per A/B slave =

1 channel per A/B slave (fixed slave assignment)

Analogue channels per output slave Number of analogue channels per output slave






Fail-safe state Behaviour of the slave outputs if an interrupted fieldbus connection is detected

Reset outputs* =

All AS-i outputs are switched off in case of an interrupted EtherNet/IP connection (value = 0).

Hold outputs = The outputs are held in the last valid state that existed before the interrupted connection was detected.

Change byte order Byte order in a word

Setting applies to all data of object class 4, instances 100 and 150

Disabled* = Byte order in word remains unchanged.

Enabled = Byte order in word is inverted.

* ... Default setting

In the 'Independent' configuration mode, the device-specific parameters are configured via the GUI of the device (→ Configuration mode: Independent (→ page 341)).

161



>

Parameters: Top-down mode 12792


Analogue channels per input slave Number of analogue channels per input slave






Analogue channels per output slave Number of analogue channels per output slave






Modify slave order analogue IN Order of analogue input slaves can be changed

Disabled* = The order of slaves remains unchanged (basic setting).

Enabled = The order of slaves can be changed (parameters in the following row).

1st analogue IN slave (slot 9) ... 15th analogue IN slave (slot 9)

1st analogue IN slave (slot 10) ... 15th analogue IN slave (slot 10)

Assignment of analogue input slaves 1 to 15 of AS-i master 1/2 to AS-i slave addresses

These settings are only effective if parameters Analogue channels per input slave = 4 channels and Modify slave order analogue IN = Enabled

Slave 1 AS-i master 1 Slave 2 AS-i master 1 ... Slave 31 AS-i master 1 Slave 1 AS-i master 2 Slave 2 AS-i master 2 ... Slave 31 AS-i master 2

Modify slave order analogue OUT Order of analogue output slaves can be changed

Disabled = The order of slaves remains unchanged (basic setting).

Enabled = The order of slaves can be changed (parameters in the following row).

1st analogue OUT slave (slot 11) ... 15th analogue OUT slave (slot 11)

1st analogue OUT slave (slot 12) ... 15th analogue OUT slave (slot 12)

Assignment of analogue output slaves 1 to 15 of AS-i master 1/2 to AS-i slave addresses

These parameters are only effective if parameters Analogue channels per out slave = 4 channels and Modify slave order analogue OUT = Enabled

Slave 1 AS-i master 1 Slave 2 AS-i master 1 ... Slave 31 AS-i master 1 Slave 1 AS-i master 2 Slave 2 AS-i master 2 ... Slave 31 AS-i master 2*

Fail-safe state Behaviour of the slave outputs if an interrupted fieldbus connection is detected

Reset outputs* =

All AS-i outputs are switched off in case of an interrupted Profinet connection (value = 0).

Hold outputs = The outputs are held in the last valid state that existed before the interrupted connection was detected.

162




Change byte order Change byte order in a word

Setting applies to all data of object class 4, instances 100 and 150

Disabled* = Byte order in a word remains unchanged.

Enabled = Byte order in a word is inverted.

AS-i parameter download Transmission of AS-i slave parameters from host to AC142n

Disabled* = The following AS-i parameter data is NOT sent to the AS-i system.

Enabled* = The following AS-i parameter data is sent to the AS-i system.

Param. slave 1(A) AS-i master 1 … Param. slave 31(A) AS-i master 1

Param. slave 1B AS-i master 1 … Param. slave 31B AS-i master 1

Param. slave 1(A) AS-i master 2 … Param. slave 31(A) AS-i master 2

Param. slave 1B AS-i master 2 … Param. slave 31B AS-i master 2

Parameters P3...P0 of the individual AS-i slaves

P3...P0 = 0x0 (= 0b0000) ... P3...P0 = 0xF (= 0b1111) for single slaves* P3...P0 = 0x7 (= 0b0111) for A/B slaves*

* ... Default settings

In 'Top-down' configuration mode, the device-specific parameters are set via the fieldbus projection software (→ Configuration mode: Top-down (→ page 336)).

163



>

Parameter setting via the configuration assembly object

Device-specific parameters ..................................................................................................................164 Parameters of the fieldbus slots ...........................................................................................................174 Derivation of parameter values for free slave assignment ...................................................................180

12810

In → Configuration mode: Top-down (→ page 336), the parameter data are set in the EtherNet/IP projection software (→ Configuration mode: Top-down (→ page 336)). By means of the configuration assembly object, the configuration is then transferred to the device and activated.

Only when a connection is established by the I/O scanner will the parameter data configured via the configuration assembly object be transferred to the device. Changes to the parameter data in the online mode of the controller will therefore only become effective after the next connection.

To trigger a new connection setup, perform one of the following actions:

Reboot the device

Perform a system reset (→ System reset (→ page 86))

Briefly interrupt the EtherNet/IP connection between the I/O scanner and the device

Transfer the project from the higher-level controller to the device (download)

Restart the I/O scanner

The configuration in top-down mode includes the following parameters:

Parameters of the fieldbus slots (→ page 174)

Device-specific parameters (→ page 164)

164



>

Device-specific parameters 12812

Data points in the configuration assembly

Possible setting values

[hex]

Default values when using EDS

file

Description

with EDS without

EDS

AC1421 AC1422

C.Failsafe state n=60 00 X X Reset AS-i outputs

01 Hold AS-i outputs

C.Swap byteorder n=61 00 X X deactivated

01 activated

C.Analogue channels IN

n=62 01 1 channel

02 2 channels

04 X X 4 channels

0B 1 channel per A/B

C.Analogue channels OUT

n=63 01 1 channel

02 2 channels

04 X X 4 channels

0B 1 channel per A/B

C.Analogue IN order 1

n=64 00 X X deactivated

01 activated

C.1st analogue IN Slot 9 2

n=65 41 ... 5F 41 41

AS-i 1 slave 1... 31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1... 31

C.2nd analogue IN Slot 9 2

n=66 41 ... 5F 42 42

AS-i 1 slave 1, 2 ... 31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1... 31

C.3rd analogue IN Slot 9 2

n=67 41 ... 5F 43 43

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 3 ... 31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 31

C.4th analogue IN Slot 9 2

n=68 41 ... 5F 44 44

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 4 ... 31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 31


n=69 41 ... 5F 45 45

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 5 ... 31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 31


n=70 41 ... 5F

46 46

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 6 ... 31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1... 31


n=71 41 ... 5F 47 47

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 7 .... 31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 31


n=72 41 ... 5F 48 48

AS-i 1 slave 1 .. 8 ... 31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 31


n=73 41 ... 5F 49 49

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 9 ... 31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 31


n=74 41 ... 5F 4A 4A

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 10 ... 31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 31

165





[hex]


file

Description

with EDS without

EDS

AC1421 AC1422


n=75 41 ... 5F 4B 4B

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 11 ... 31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 31


n=76 41 ... 5F 4C 4D

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 12 ... 31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 31


n=77 41 ... 5F 4D 4D

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 13 ... 31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 31


n=78 41 ... 5F 4E 4E

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 14 ... 31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 31


n=79 41 ... 5F 4F 4F

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 15 ... 31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 31

C.1st analogue IN Slot 10 2

n=80 41 ... 5F 81 81

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 31

C.2nd analogue IN Slot 10 2

n=81 41 ... 5F 82 82

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1, 2 ... 31

C.3rd analogue IN Slot 10 2

n=82 41 ... 5F 83 83

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 3 ... 31


n=83 41 ... 5F 84 84

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 4 ... 31


n=84 41 ... 5F 85 85

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 5 ... 31


n=85 41 ... 5F 86 86

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 6 ... 31


n=86 41 ... 5F 87 87

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 7 ... 31


n=87 41 ... 5F 88 88

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 8 ... 31


n=88 41 ... 5F 89 89

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 9 ... 31


n=89 41 ... 5F 8A 8A

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 10 ... 31


n=90 41 ... 5F 8B 8B

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 11 ... 31


n=91 41 ... 5F 8C 8C

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 12 ... 31


n=92 41 ... 5F 8D 8D

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 13 ... 31

C.14th analogue IN n=93 41 ... 5F 8E 8E AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 31

166





[hex]


file

Description

with EDS without

EDS

AC1421 AC1422

Slot 10 2 81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 14 ... 31


n=94 41 ... 5F 8F 8F

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 15 ... 31

C.Analogue OUT order 1


01 activated

C.1st analogue OUT Slot 11 3

n=96 41 ... 5F 50 50

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 16 ...31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 31

C.2nd analogue OUT

Slot 11 3

n=97 41 ... 5F 51 51

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 17 ...31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 31

C.3rd analogue OUT Slot 11 3

n=98 41 ... 5F 52 52

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 18 ...31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 31

C.4th analogue OUT Slot 11 3

n=99 41 ... 5F 53 53

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 19 ...31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 31


n=100 41 ... 5F 54 54

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 20 ...31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 31


n=101 41 ... 5F 55 55

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 21 ...31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 31


n=102 41 ... 5F 56 56

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 22 ... 31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 31


n=103 41 ... 5F 57 57

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 23 ...31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 31


n=104 41 ... 5F 58 58

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 24 ...31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 31

C.10th analogue OUT slot 11 3

n=105 41 ... 5F 59 59

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 25 ...31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 31


n=106 41 ... 5F 5A 5A

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 26 ...31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 31


n=107 41 ... 5F 5B 5B

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 27 ...31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 31


n=108 41 ... 5F 5C 5C

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 28 ...31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 31


n=109 41 ... 5F 5D 5D

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 29 ...31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 31


n=110 41 ... 5F 5E 5E

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 30, 31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 31

C.1st analogue OUT Slot 12 3

n=111 41 ... 5F 91 91

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 16 ... 31

167





[hex]


file

Description

with EDS without

EDS

AC1421 AC1422

C.2nd analogue OUT

Slot 12 3

n=112 41 ... 5F 92 92

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 17 ... 31

C.3rd analogue OUT Slot 12 3

n=113 41 ... 5F 93 93

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 18 ... 31


n=114 41 ... 5F 94 94

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 19 ... 31


n=115 41 ... 5F

95 95

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 20 ... 31


n=116 41 ... 5F 96 96

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 21 ... 31


n=117 41 ... 5F 97 97

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 22 ... 31


n=118 41 ... 5F 98 98

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 23 ... 31


n=119 41 ... 5F 99 99

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 24 ... 31


n=120 41 ... 5F 9A 9A

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 25 ... 31


n=121 41 ... 5F 9B 9B

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 26 ... 31


n=122 41 ... 5F 9B 9B

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 27 ... 31


n=123 41 ... 5F 9C 9C

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 28 ... 31


n=124 41 ... 5F 9D 9D

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 29 ... 31


n=125 41 ... 5F 9E 9E

AS-i 1 slave 1 ... 31

81 ... 9F AS-i 2 slave 1 ... 30, 31

C.AS-i Parameter Download 1


01 activated

C.Parameter slave 1(A) AS-i 1 4

n=127 00 ... 0F 0F 0F Parameter for AS-i slave 1(A)


n=128 00 ... 0F 0F 0F Parameter for AS-i 1 slave 2(A)





168





[hex]


file

Description

with EDS without

EDS

AC1421 AC1422






















n=141 00 ... 0F 0F 0F Parameter for AS-i slave 15(A)

























169





[hex]


file

Description

with EDS without

EDS

AC1421 AC1422









C.Parameter slave 1B AS-i 1 4

n=158 00 ... 0F 07 07 Parameter for AS-i 1 slave 1B












n=1564

00 ... 0F 07 07 Parameter for AS-i 1 slave 7B

























170





[hex]


file

Description

with EDS without

EDS

AC1421 AC1422















































171





[hex]


file

Description

with EDS without

EDS

AC1421 AC1422















































172





[hex]


file

Description

with EDS without

EDS

AC1421 AC1422















































173





[hex]


file

Description

with EDS without

EDS

AC1421 AC1422











Legend:

1 = Free slave assignment only possible in top-down mode. 2 = Parameter can only be set if [C.analogue IN order] = 01 and [C.Analogue channels IN] = 4 channels 3 = Parameter can only be set if [C.analogue OUT order] = 01 and [C.Analogue channels OUT] = 4 channels 4 = Parameter can only be set if [C.AS-i param. download] = 01

174



>

Parameters of the fieldbus slots 12811

NOTICE

Risk of data loss!






Slot

[dec]

Data points in the configuration

assembly

Possible setting values [hex]


file

Description

with EDS

without EDS

n+3 n+2 n+1 n AC1421 AC1422

1 C.Slot1 n=0 00 00 00 00 Empty module

00 00 10 02 1: digital IN AS-i 1, Slaves 01(A) ... 03(A)




00 00 10 0A 1: digital IN AS-i 1, Slaves 01(A) ... 19(A)

00 00 10 0C 1: digital IN AS-i 1, Slaves 01(A) ... 23(A)

00 00 10 0E 1: digital IN AS-i 1, Slaves 01(A) ... 27(A)

00 00 10 10 X X 1: digital IN AS-i 1, Slaves 01(A) ... 31(A)


00 00 20 02 2: digital OUT AS-i 1, Slaves 01(A) ... 03(A)




00 00 20 0A 2: digital OUT AS-i 1, Slaves 01(A) ... 19(A)

00 00 20 0C 2: digital OUT AS-i 1, Slaves 01(A) ... 23(A)

00 00 20 0E 2: digital OUT AS-i 1, Slaves 01(A) ... 27(A)

00 00 20 10 X X 2: digital OUT AS-i 1, Slaves 01(A) ... 31(A)

3 C.Slot3 n=8 00 00 00 00 X Empty module





175



Slot

[dec]


assembly



file

Description

with EDS

without EDS

n+3 n+2 n+1 n AC1421 AC1422

00 02 10 0A 3: digital IN AS-i 2, Slaves 01(A) ... 19(A)

00 02 10 0C 3: digital IN AS-i 2, Slaves 01(A) ... 23(A)

00 02 10 0E 3: digital IN AS-i 2, Slaves 01(A) ... 27(A)

00 02 10 10 X 3: digital IN AS-i 2, Slaves 01(A) ... 31(A)






00 02 20 0A 4: digital OUT AS-i 2, Slaves 01(A) ... 19(A)

00 02 20 0C 4: digital OUT AS-i 2, Slaves 01(A) ... 23(A)

00 02 20 0E 4: digital OUT AS-i 2, Slaves 01(A) ... 27(A)

00 02 20 10 X 4: digital OUT AS-i 2, Slaves 01(A) ... 31(A)


00 01 10 02 5: digital IN AS-i 1, Slaves 01B ... 03B




00 01 10 0A 5: digital IN AS-i 1, Slaves 01B ... 19B

00 01 10 0C 5: digital IN AS-i 1, Slaves 01B ... 23B

00 01 10 0E 5: digital IN AS-i 1, Slaves 01B ... 27B

00 01 10 10 X X 5: digital IN AS-i 1, Slaves 01B ... 31B


00 01 20 02 6: digital OUT AS-i 1, Slaves 01B ... 03B




00 01 20 0A 6: digital OUT AS-i 1, Slaves 01B ... 19B

00 01 20 0C 6: digital OUT AS-i 1, Slaves 01B ... 23B

00 01 20 0E 6: digital OUT AS-i 1, Slaves 01B ... 27B

00 01 20 10 X X 6: digital OUT AS-i 1, Slaves 01B ... 31B





176



Slot

[dec]


assembly



file

Description

with EDS

without EDS

n+3 n+2 n+1 n AC1421 AC1422


00 03 10 0A 7: digital IN AS-i 2, Slaves 01B ... 19B

00 03 10 0C 7: digital IN AS-i 2, Slaves 01B ... 23B

00 03 10 0E 7: digital IN AS-i 2, Slaves 01B ... 27B

00 03 10 10 X 7: digital IN AS-i 2, Slaves 01B ... 31B






00 03 20 0A 8: digital OUT AS-i 2, Slaves 01B ... 19B

00 03 20 0C 8: digital OUT AS-i 2, Slaves 01B ... 23B

00 03 20 0E 8: digital OUT AS-i 2, Slaves 01B ... 27B

00 03 20 10 X 8: digital OUT AS-i 2, Slaves 01B ... 31B


00 00 50 08 9: analog IN range 1, 04 words














00 00 50 78 X X 9: analog IN range 1, 60 words

10 C.Slot10

n=36 00 00 00 00 X Empty module





177



Slot

[dec]


assembly



file

Description

with EDS

without EDS

n+3 n+2 n+1 n AC1421 AC1422











00 00 50 78 X 10: analog IN range 2, 60 words

11 C.Slot11

n=40 00 00 00 00 Empty module

00 00 60 08 11: analog OUT range 1, 04 words














00 00 60 78 X X 11: analog OUT range 1, 60 words

12 C.Slot12

n=44 00 00 00 00 X Empty module









178



Slot

[dec]


assembly



file

Description

with EDS

without EDS

n+3 n+2 n+1 n AC1421 AC1422







00 00 60 78 X 12: analog OUT range 2, 60 words

13 C.Slot13

n=48 00 00 00 00 Empty module

00 00 D0 32 X 13: AC1421 (25 words)

00 02 D0 64 X 13: AC1422 (50 words)

00 00 D0 1A 13: AC13x7 AS-i 1 (13 words)

00 02 D0 34 13: AC13x7 AS-i 1+2 (26 words)

14 C.Slot14

n=52 00 00 00 00 X X Empty module

00 04 10 08 14: Inputs from AC142n-PLC, 4 words
















00 04 10 B8 14: Inputs from AC142n-PLC, 92 words

179



Slot

[dec]


assembly



file

Description

with EDS

without EDS

n+3 n+2 n+1 n AC1421 AC1422

00 04 10 D8 14: Inputs from AC142n-PLC, 108 words

00 04 10 F0 14: Inputs from AC142n-PLC, 120 words

15 C.Slot15

n=56 00 00 00 00 X X Empty module

00 04 20 08 15: Outputs to AC142n-PLC, 4 words
















00 04 20 B8 15: Outputs to AC142n-PLC, 92 words

00 04 20 D8 15: Outputs to AC142n-PLC, 108 words

00 04 20 F0 15: Outputs to AC142n-PLC, 120 words

180



>

Derivation of parameter values for free slave assignment 17744

The following table shows the derivation of parameter values for a free assignment of slaves within the analogue areas.

A free assignment of analogue slaves in slots 9...12 can only be applied if the parameters [C.Analogue channels IN] and [C.Analogue channels OUT] are set to the value 4 channels!

Byte

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

AS-i 2 AS-i 1 Reserved Slave address (1...31)

Legend:

Master: AS-i master 1 = 0x40

AS-i master 2 = 0x80

Slave: Slave 1 = 0x01 ...

Slave 31 = 0x1F

Derivation: byte value = master + slave (→ Examples (→ page 180))

>

Examples 17745

Byte

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

1 0 0 0x02

= 0x82 = AS-i master 2, slave 2

0 1 0 0x1F

= 0x5F = AS-i master 1, slave 31

>

EDS-file 12789

The EDS file (Electronic Data Sheet)is used to easily integrate the AC142n in a fieldbus projecting software. The EDS supplies a profile of the fieldbus device in form of an ASCII file. It describes all features of the device such as communication parameters and objects.

The EDS file is saved in the device. It can be downloaded directly to the configuration PC via the web interface (→ Download the device and I/O description (→ page 95)).

181



>

8.7.4 Cyclic data 12417

The cyclic process data are updated through the fieldbus mechanisms at regular intervals. They belong to the category of implicit messaging (→ Implicit Messaging (→ page 354)) and are therefore real-time capable.

Slots combine the process data of several AS-i slaves. The following tables show the available EtherNet/IP modules.

The user must set the content and length of the cyclically transmitted data either at the device (→ Configuration mode: Independent (→ page 341)) or in the EtherNet/IP projection software by means the configuration assembly object (→ Configuration mode: Top-down (→ page 336), → Parameter setting via the configuration assembly object (→ page 163)).

182



>

EtherNet/IP modules 12419

NOTICE

Risk of data loss!






Slot

Description Further information

1 Digital input data single or A slaves, AS-i master 1 → Slot 1 – Digital input data single or A slaves, AS-i master 1 (→ page 183)

2 Digital output data single or A slaves, AS-i master 1 → Slot 2 – Digital output data single or A slaves, AS-i master 1 (→ page 183)

3 Digital input data single or A slaves, AS-i master 2



4 Digital output data single or A slaves, AS-i master 2



5 Digital input data B slaves, AS-i master 1 → Slot 5 – Digital input data B slaves, AS-i master 1 (→ page 185)

6 Digital output data B slaves, AS-i master 1 → Slot 6 – Digital output data B slaves, AS-i master 1 (→ page 185)

7 Digital input data B slaves, AS-i master 2



8 Digital output data B slaves, AS-i master 2



9 Analogue input data of up to 31 slaves, range 1* → Slot 9 – Analogue input data (→ page 189)

10 Analogue input data of up to 31 slaves, range 2* → Slot 10 – Analogue input data (→ page 190)

11 Analogue output data of up to 31 slaves, range 1** → Slot 11 – Analogue output data (→ page 191)

12 Analogue output data of up to 31 slaves, range 2** → Slot 12 – Analogue output data (→ page 192)

13 Diagnostic data → Slot 13 – Diagnostic data (→ page 197)

14 Data from the device-internal PLC to the EtherNet/IP PLC

→ Slot 14 – Inputs from PLC (→ page 215)

15 Data from the EtherNet/IP PLC to the device-internal PLC

→ Slot 15 – Outputs to PLC (→ page 216)

* ... Define the number of analogue channels and the slave number by means of the device parameters [analogue channels/I-slave] (→ Device-specific parameters (→ page 159)).

** ... Define the number of analogue channels and the slave number by means of the device parameters [analogue channels/O-slave] (→ Device-specific parameters (→ page 159)).

183



>

Slot 1 – Digital input data single or A slaves, AS-i master 1 12428

Slot

Description Value range Length [words]

1 Digital input data of single or A slaves, connected to AS-i master 1

Empty module = Module is disabled 0

01 ... 03 = Module is active with slaves 1(A) ... 3(A), AS-i master 1 1






01 ... 27 = Module is active with slaves 1(A) ...27(A), AS-i master 1 7


The data of 4 AS-i slaves is transmitted in each word (→ Mapping of the digital input/output data (→ page 187)). >

Slot 2 – Digital output data single or A slaves, AS-i master 1 12429

Slot


2 Digital output data of single or A slaves, connected to AS-i master 1










The data of 4 AS-i slaves is transmitted in each word (→ Mapping of the digital input/output data (→ page 187)).

184



>

Slot 3 – Digital input data single or A slaves, AS-i master 2 12430

Slot


3 Digital input data of single or A slaves, connected to AS-i master 2 (only available for devices with 2 AS-i masters)











Slot 4 – Digital output data single or A slaves, AS-i master 2 12431

Slot


4 Digital output data of single or A slaves, connected to AS-i master 2 (only available for devices with 2 AS-i masters)











185



>

Slot 5 – Digital input data B slaves, AS-i master 1 12433

Slot


5 Digital input data of B slaves, connected to AS-i master 1


01B ... 03B = Module is active with slaves 1B ... 3B, AS-i master 1 1









Slot 6 – Digital output data B slaves, AS-i master 1 12435

Slot


6 Digital output data of B slaves, connected to AS-i master 1











186



>

Slot 7 – Digital input data B slaves, AS-i master 2 12436

Slot


7 Digital input data of B slaves, connected to AS-i master 2 (only available for devices with 2 AS-i masters)











Slot 8 – Digital output data B slaves, AS-i master 2 12437

Slot


8 Digital output data of B slaves, connected to AS-i master 2 (only available for devices with 2 AS-i masters)





01B ... 15B = Module is active with slaves 1B ... 15Bl, AS-i master 2 4






187



>

Mapping of the digital input/output data 13447

This table illustrates the mapping of digital input/output data of the individual slaves to the bytes of the transmitted words:

Word AS-i slave addresses

Bits 15...12

Bits 11...8

Bits 7...4

Bits 3...0

1 M flags* 1(A) / 1B 2(A) / 2B 3(A) / 3B

2 4(A) / 4B 5(A) / 5B 6(A) / 6B 7(A) / 7B

3 8(A) / 8B 9(A) / 9B 10(A) / 10B 11(A) / 11B

4 12(A) / 12B 13(A) / 13B 14(A) / 14B 15(A) / 15B

5 16(A) / 16B 17(A) / 17B 18(A) / 18B 19(A) / 19B

6 20(A) / 20B 21(A) / 21B 22(A) / 22B 23(A) / 23B

7 24(A) / 24B 25(A) / 25B 26(A) / 26B 27(A) / 27B

8 28(A) / 28B 29(A) / 29B 30(A) / 30B 31(A) / 31B

Legend:

* ... The master flags (M flags) are only transmitted in the digital input data (→ Table: Master flags (→ page 188)).

>

Example: structure of the digital input data 13450

Task: The digital input data of slaves 1A, 3 and 6A of AS-i master 1 are to be transmitted.

Solution: Slot: 1 Module configuration: 01 ... 07

Data length: 2 words

The following table shows in which positions of the two word sized data block the digital input data of the slaves are transmitted:

Data block (2 words)

Bits 31...28

Bits 27...24

Bits 23...20

Bits 19...16

Bits 15...12

Bits 11...8

Bits 7...4

Bits 3...0

1A 3 6A

188



>

Table: Master flags 12475

Bits 12...15 of the first word of the digital input data contain the master flags. They provide information on the operating state of the AS-i master. The following table shows the meaning of each bit:

Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12

AS-i power fail (19 V)

Configuration error in the AS-i circuit

AS-i master is offline (AS-i data is invalid)

Periphery fault in the AS-i circuit

Possible values per bit: 0 = no error 1 = error

In the digital output data, bits 12...15 have no relevance and are not evaluated!

189



>

Slot 9 – Analogue input data 12438

Slot


9 Data area with a maximum length of 60 words for cyclic transmission of analogue input information

Default setting: analogue inputs of AS-i slaves 01 ... 15, connected to AS-i master 1

The valid and

overflow flags that each

analogue AS-i input slave provides for each channel are NOT represented here. If required, they can be read out via the acyclic services. (→ The acyclic process data).

Empty module = Module is deactivated 0

004 words = Module is activated with 4 analog channels 4


012 words = Module is activated with 12analog channels 12













The exact mapping of analogue input data within this area depends on the parameter setting [Analog. channels/I-slave] (→ Configuration of the analogue channels in slots 9 ... 12 (→ page 193)).

190



>

Slot 10 – Analogue input data 124390

Slot


10 Data area with a maximum length of 60 words for cyclic transmission of analogue input information

Default setting: analogue inputs of AS-i slaves 01.. 15, connected to AS-i master 2 (only available for devices with 2 AS-i masters)

The valid and

overflow flags that each analogue AS-i input slave provides for each channel are NOT represented here. If required, they can be read out via the acyclic services (Explicit Messaging) (→ The acyclic process data).











040 words =Module is activated with 40 analog channels 40






The exact mapping of analogue input data within this area depends on the parameter setting [Analog. channels/I-slave] (→ Configuration of the analogue channels in slots 9 ... 12 (→ page 193)).

191



>

Slot 11 – Analogue output data 12440

Slot


11 Data area with a maximum length of 60 words for cyclic transmission of analogue output information.

Default setting: analogue outputs of AS-i slaves 16...30, connected to AS-i master 1

















The exact mapping of analogue output data within this area depends on the parameter setting [Analog. channels/O-slave] (→ Configuration of the analogue channels in slots 9 ... 12 (→ page 193)).

192



>

Slot 12 – Analogue output data 12442

Slot


12 Data area with a maximum length of 60 words for cyclic transmission of analogue output information.

Default setting: analogue outputs of AS-i slaves 16...30, connected to AS-i master 2 (only available for devices with 2 AS-i masters)

















The exact mapping of analogue output data within this area depends on the parameter setting [Analog. channels/O-slave] (→ Configuration of the analogue channels in slots 9 ... 12 (→ page 193)).

193



>

Configuration of the analogue channels in slots 9 ... 12 12471

The configuration of the EtherNet/IP device parameters [Analog. channels/I-slave] and [Analog. channels/O-slave] determines which analogue channels of the AS-i slaves are transmitted. The following table shows the meaning of the adjustable parameter values:

Parameter values Description

4 channels Variable slave assignment

The analogue channels of max. 30 slave addresses are transferred:

single slaves: channels 1...4 or: A slaves: channels 1+2 and B slaves: channels 1+2

The device-specific parameters (→ Device-specific parameters (→ page 164)) of the device allow you to individually define the order of 15 of the analogue slaves to be transferred, respectively (→ Table: variable slave assignment for slots 9 ... 12 (→ page 196)). All available slave addresses of both AS-i masters can be selected.

Preset, variable:

for slot 9: AS-i master 1: single slaves 1 ... 15 or: slave 1A ... 15A, 1B ... 15B

for slot 10: AS-i master 2: single slaves 1 ... 15 or: slave 1A ... 15A, 1B ... 15B

for slot 11: AS-i master 1: single slaves 16 ... 30 or: slave 16A .... 30A, 15B ... 30B

for slot 12: AS-i master 2: single slaves 16 ... 30 or: slave 16A .... 30A, 15B ... 30B

2 channels Fixed slave assignment

Of each transferring AS-i single and A address, the following analogue channels are transmitted:

of single slaves: channels 1+2 or: of A slaves: channels 1+2

The slave assignment is fixed (→ Table: Fixed slave assignment for slots 9 ... 12 (→ page 194)). A configuration of the slave order in the device-specific parameters is ineffective.

1 channel Fixed slave assignment

Of each transferring AS-i single and A address, the following analogue channels are transmitted:

single slaves: channel 1 or: A slaves: channel 1


1 channel A/B-Slave Fixed slave assignment

Of each transferring slave address, the following analogue channels are transmitted:

single slaves: channels 1+3 or: A slaves: channel 1 and B slaves: channel 1


194



>

Table: Fixed slave assignment for slots 9 ... 12 12472

Word Word content for the following number of analogue channels per input/output slave

2 channels 1 channel 1 channel A/B-Slave

1 Mx / slave 1(A) / Channel 1 Mx / slave 1(A) / Channel 1 Mx / slave 1(A) / Channel 1

2 Mx / slave 1(A) / Channel 2 Mx / slave 2(A) / Channel 1 Mx / slave 1B / Channel 1 = Mx / slave 1 / Channel 3





7 Mx / slave 4(A) / Channel 1 Mx / slave 7(A) / Channel 1 Mx / slave 4(A) / Channel 1 1



10 Mx / slave 5(A) / Channel 2 Mx / slave 10(A) / Channel 1 Mx / slave 5B /Channel 1 = Mx / slave 5 / Channel 3




















30 Mx / slave 15(A) / Channel 2 Mx / slave 30(A) / Channel 1 Mx / slave 15B / Channel 1= Mx / slave 15 / Channel 3

31 Mx / slave 16(A) /Channel 1 Mx / slave 31(A) / Channel 1 Mx / slave 16(A) / Channel 1

32 Mx / slave 16(A) / Channel 2 Mx / slave 16B / Channel 1 = Mx / slave 16 / Channel 3

33 Mx / slave 17(A) / Channel 1 Mx / slave 17(A) / Channel 1

34 Mx / slave 17(A) / Channel 2 Mx / slave 17B / Channel 1= Mx / slave 17 / Channel 3




195








43 Mx / slave 22(A) /Channel 1 Mx / slave 22(A) / Channel 1
















59 Mx / slave 30(A) / Channel 1 Mx / slave 30(A) /Channel 1


Legend:

x ... - slot 9 + 11: x=1 (M1 = AS-i master 1) - slot 10 + 12: x=2 (M2 = AS-i master 2)

196



>

Table: variable slave assignment for slots 9 ... 12 13451

Word offset no.

Content of transmitted word for parameter value 4 channels

n Mx / slave m(A) / channel 1

n+1 Mx / slave m(A) / channel 2

n+2 Mx / slave m(A) / channel 1 = Mx / slave mB / channel 1


Legend:

n ... number of 4-word blocks 1 = if 4 words are set ... 15 = if 60 words are set

x ... 1 = AS-i master 1 2 = AS-i master 2

m ... numerical part of the selected AS-i slave address

Variable AS-i slave assignment is only possible in top-down mode. In the EtherNet/IP projection software, each word can be assigned the data of an AS-i slave via the configuration assembly object. Otherwise, the preset values apply (→ Configuration of the analogue channels in slots 9 ... 12 (→ page 193)).

To assign a specific AS-i slave address to the transferring channels:

► Open the project in the EtherNet/IP projection software.

► Make the following settings in the configuration assembly object:

Activate the data point C.Analogue IN order (= 0x01).

Assign the desired slave addresses to the input channels in the data points C.1st analogue IN Slot 9 to

C.15th analogue IN Slot 10.

Activate the data point C. Analogue OUT order (= 0x01).

Assign the desired slave addresses to the output channels in the data points C.1st analogue OUT Slot 11

... C.15th analogue OUT Slot 12 .

► Save the set values and transfer the project to the device (download).

197



>

Slot 13 – Diagnostic data 12470

Slot

Description Value range Data length

[words]

13 Diagnostic data sent to the I/O scanner

Contents of diagnostic data: → following tables

Empty module 0

AC1421 25

AC1422 50

AC13x7 AS-i 1 *) 13

AC13x7 AS-i 1+2 *) 26

Legend:

*) ... compatible with the diagnostic data of predecessor models AC1327/37

198



>

Module setting: AC1421 12624

The diagnostic data for the module settings AC1421 have 25 words.

Overview diagnostic range:

Word Description

1 System diagnosis

2...5 AS-i master 1: AS-i diagnosis

6...9 AS-i master 1: list of missing slaves

10...13 AS-i master 1: List of non-projected slaves

14...17 AS-i master 1: List of slaves with wrong slave profile

18...21 AS-i master 1: list of peripheral faults

22...25 AS-i master 1: list of multiple addressed slaves

199



>

Diagnosis - system diagnosis 12657

System diagnosis:

Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 - - - - - - - - - - - - PS GI OT ISE

Legend:

Alarm Description

ISE Internal System Error Interner K6-Systemfehler

OT over temperature: temperature inside the device has exceeded the permissible max. temperature value

GI gateway inactive: the gateway mode was deactivated

PS PLC stop: The controller was stopped

200



>

Diagnosis - AS-i master 1: AS-i diagnosis 12658

AS-i master 1: AS-i diagnostics:

Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

2 - - PF19 PF22.

5 EF S0 PM IME - - - DAE PE CEIP CEAS CEMS

3 Voltage AS-i+ to AS-i- in mV

4 Voltage FE to AS-i- in mV

5 Symmetry in % (-100% ... +100%)

Legend:

Alarm Description

IME internal master error: Internal system error of an AS-i master

PM projection mode: AS-i master was set to the projection mode.

S0 slave 0 detected: New slave 0 was detected.

EF earth fault: Earth fault was detected

PF22.5 22.5V AS-i Power-Fail (classic AS-i Power) was detected.

PF19 19 AS-i Power-Fail (Power24) was detected.

CEMS Configuration Error – Missing Slave: AS-i configuration error, one or several slaves are projected, but not available.

CEAS Configuration Error – Additional Slave: AS-i configuration error, one or several slaves are available, but not projected.

CEIP Configuration Error – Invalid Profile: AS-i configuration error, the slave profiles of one or several slaves differ from the projected slave profiles.

PE periphery error: One or several AS-i slaves have a periphery error.

DAE duplicate address error: One or several multiple-addressing faults occurred.

201



>

Diagnosis - AS-i master 1: List of missing slaves 2659

AS-i master 1: list of missing slaves:

Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

6 15(A) 14(A) 13(A) 12(A) 11(A) 10(A) 9(A) 8(A) 7(A) 6(A) 5(A) 4(A) 3(A) 2(A) 1(A) 0

7 31(A) 30(A) 29(A) 28(A) 27(A) 26(A) 25(A) 24(A) 23(A) 22(A) 21(A) 20(A) 19(A) 18(A) 17(A) 16(A)

8 15B 14B 13B 12B 11B 10B 9B 8B 7B 6B 5B 4B 3B 2B 1B n.a.

9 31B 30B 29B 28B 27B 26B 25B 24B 23B 22B 21B 20B 19B 18B 17B 16B

If at least 1 bit is set in this list, the bit for CEMS is also set. (→ Diagnosis - AS-i master 1: AS-i diagnosis (→ page 200))

>

Diagnosis - AS-i master 1: List of non-projected slaves 12660

AS-i master 1: List of non-projected slaves:

Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0





If at least 1 bit is set in this list, the bit for CEAS is also set. (→ Diagnosis - AS-i master 1: AS-i diagnosis (→ page 200))

>

Diagnosis - AS-i master 1: List of slaves with wrong slave profile 12663

AS-i master 1: List of slaves with wrong slave profile:

Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0





If at least 1 bit is set in this list, the bit for CEIP is also set. (→ Diagnosis - AS-i master 1: AS-i diagnosis (→ page 200))

202



>

Diagnosis - AS-i master 1: List of peripheral faults 2664

AS-i master 1: list of peripheral faults:

Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0





If at least 1 bit is set in this list, the bit for PE is also set. (→ Diagnosis - AS-i master 1: AS-i diagnosis (→ page 200))

>

Diagnosis - AS-i master 1: list of multiple addressed slaves 12665

AS-i master 1: list of multiple addressed slaves:

Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0





If at least 1 bit is set in this list, the bit for DAE is also set. (→ Diagnosis - AS-i master 1: AS-i diagnosis (→ page 200)).

203



>

Module setting: AC1422 2625

The diagnostic data for the module settings AC1422 have 50 words. Words 1 to 25 correspond to

those of the module setting AC1421 (→ Module setting: AC1421 (→ page 198)).


Word Description

1 System diagnosis













50 reserved

204



>

Diagnosis - system diagnosis 12738

→ Diagnosis - system diagnosis (→ page 199) >


→ Diagnosis - AS-i master 1: AS-i diagnosis (→ page 200) >

Diagnosis - AS-i master 1: list of missing slaves 12740

→ Diagnosis - AS-i master 1: List of missing slaves (→ page 201) >


→ Diagnosis - AS-i master 1: List of non-projected slaves (→ page 201) >


→ Diagnosis - AS-i master 1: List of slaves with wrong slave profile (→ page 201) >

Diagnosis - AS-i master 1: list of peripheral faults 12743

→ Diagnosis - AS-i master 1: List of peripheral faults (→ page 202) >


→ Diagnosis - AS-i master 1: list of multiple addressed slaves (→ page 202)

205



>



Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

26 - - PF19 PF22.

5 EF S0 PM IME - - - DAE PE CEIP CEAS CEMS

27 Voltage AS-i+ to AS-i- in mV

28 Voltage FE to AS-i- in mV

29 Symmetry in % (-100% ... +100%)

Legend:

Alarm Description

IME internal master error: Internal system error of an AS-i master

PM projection mode: AS-i master was set to the projection mode.

S0 slave 0 detected: New slave 0 was detected.

EF earth fault: Earth fault was detected

PF22.5 22.5V AS-i Power-Fail (classic AS-i Power) was detected.

PF19 19 AS-i Power-Fail (Power24) was detected.

CEMS Configuration Error – Missing Slave: AS-i configuration error, one or several slaves are projected, but not available.

CEAS Configuration Error – Additional Slave: AS-i configuration error, one or several slaves are available, but not projected.

CEIP Configuration Error – Invalid Profile: AS-i configuration error, the slave profiles of one or several slaves differ from the projected slave profiles.

PE periphery error: One or several AS-i slaves have a periphery error.

DAE duplicate address error: One or several multiple-addressing faults occurred.

>

Diagnosis - AS-i master 2: list of missing slaves 12731

AS-i master 2: list of missing slaves:

Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0





If at least 1 bit is set in this list, the bit for CEMS is also set. (→ Diagnosis - AS-i master 1: AS-i diagnosis (→ page 200))

206



>


AS-i master 2: List of non-projected slaves:

Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0





If at least 1 bit is set in this list, the bit for CEAS is also set. (→ Diagnosis - AS-i master 1: AS-i diagnosis (→ page 200))

>


AS-i master 2: List of slaves with wrong slave profile:

Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0





If at least 1 bit is set in this list, the bit for CEIP is also set. (→ Diagnosis - AS-i master 1: AS-i diagnosis (→ page 200))

>

Diagnosis - AS-i master 2: list of peripheral faults 12734

AS-i master 2: list of peripheral faults:

Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0





If at least 1 bit is set in this list, the bit for PE is also set. (→ Diagnosis - AS-i master 1: AS-i diagnosis (→ page 200))

207



>


AS-i master 2: list of multiple addressed slaves:

Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0





If at least 1 bit is set in this list, the bit for DAE is also set (→ Diagnosis - AS-i master 1: AS-i diagnosis (→ page 200)).

208



>

Module setting: AC13x7 AS-i 1 12626

The diagnostic data for the module setting AC13x7 AS-i 1 have 13 words.


Word Description

1 AS-i master 1: Master flags

2...5 AS-i master 1: list of detected slaves (LDS)

6...9 AS-i master 1: configuration error

10...13 AS-i master 1: peripheral fault (LPF)

209



>

Diagnosis - AS-i master 1: Master flags 12674


Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 - - - - - - - - - CNO

T -

PNOT

PF LDS0 CACT -

Legend:

Alarm Description

CACT Configuration Active: AS-i master is in the projection mode.

LDS0 LDS.0: A single slave with the address 0 was detected

PF AS-i_Power_Fail: AS-i voltage too low

PNOT NOT Periphery_OK: periphery fault

CNOT NOT Configuartion_OK: configuration error

- reserved

>

Diagnosis - AS-i master 1: list of detected slaves (LDS) 12675

AS-i master 1: list of detected slaves (LDS):

Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0





Possible value of slave fields:

0 ... slave was not detected 1.... slave was detected

210



>

Diagnosis - AS-i master 1: configuration error 12677

AS-i master 1: Configuration errors:

Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0






0 ... slave works correctly 1.... slave has caused configuration error

>

Diagnosis - AS-i master 1: peripheral fault (LPF) 12676

AS-i master 1: peripheral fault (LPF):

Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

10 15(A) 14(A) 13(A) 12(A) 11(A) 10(A) 9(A) 8(A) 7(A) 6(A) 5(A) 4(A) 3(A) 2(A) 1(A) n.a.





0 ... slave works correctly 1.... slave has caused a periphery fault

211



>

Module setting: AC13x7 AS-i 1+2 12627

The diagnostic data for the module setting AC13x7 AS-i 1 have 25 words. Words 1 to 13 correspond

to those of the module setting AC13x7 AS-i 1 (→ Module setting: AC13x7 AS-i 1 (→ page 208)).


Word Description









212



>


→ Diagnosis - AS-i master 1: Master flags (→ page 209) >


→ Diagnosis - AS-i master 1: list of detected slaves (LDS) (→ page 209) >


→ Diagnosis - AS-i master 1: configuration error (→ page 210) >


→ Diagnosis - AS-i master 1: peripheral fault (LPF) (→ page 210)

213



>


AS-i master 2: Master flags:

Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

14 - - - - - - - - - CNOT - PNOT PF LDS

0 CAC

T -

Legend:

Alarm Description

CACT Configuration Active: AS-i master is in the projection mode.

LDS0 LDS.0: A single slave with the address 0 was detected

PF AS-i_Power_Fail: AS-i voltage too low

PNOT NOT Periphery_OK: periphery fault

CNOT NOT Configuartion_OK: configuration error

- reserved

>


AS-i master 2: list of detected slaves (LDS):

Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0






0 ... slave was not detected 1.... slave was detected

214



>


AS-i master 2: Configuration errors:

Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0






0 ... slave works correctly 1.... slave has caused configuration error

>


AS-i master 2: peripheral fault (LPF):

Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

23 15(A) 14(A) 13(A) 12(A) 11(A) 10(A) 9(A) 8(A) 7(A) 6(A) 5(A) 4(A) 3(A) 2(A) 1(A) n.a.





0 ... slave works correctly 1.... slave has caused a periphery fault

215



>

Slot 14 – Inputs from PLC 17747

Slot

Description Value range Size

[words]

14 Data from the device-internal PLC to the EtherNet/IP PLC

Empty module = module is deactivated 0

004 words = 4 words from AC14 PLC to fieldbus PLC 4



















216



>

Slot 15 – Outputs to PLC 17746

Slot

Description Value range Size

[words]

15 Data from the EtherNet/IP PLC to the device-internal PLC

Empty module = module is deactivated 0

004 words = 4 words from fieldbus PLC to AC14 PLC 4



















217



>

8.7.5 Acyclic data

Overview: acyclic data ..........................................................................................................................218 Acyclic data records .............................................................................................................................220 Command channels ..............................................................................................................................247 Programmers' notes: call up acyclic services .......................................................................................334

12895

With the help of acyclic data, IO devices can be parameterised or configured, or status information can be read. The acyclic data are not automatically updated in the host controller, but have to be explicitly requested by means of special commands (→ Programmers' notes: call up acyclic services (→ page 334)).

Acyclic data belong to the category of explicit messages and are not real-time capable.

The following acyclic data are available:

Acyclic data set → Overview: Acyclic data sets (→ page 221)

Fieldbus command channel → Overview: System commands (→ page 250) → Overview: AS-i master commands (→ page 269)

218



>

Overview: acyclic data 12459

The attributes in object class 801, instance 1, are preset as follows:

Attribute [dec]

from byte no.

[dec]

to byte no.

[dec]

Content DS Access r = read w = write

Number of

words

1 0 51 Read system information DS1 r 26

30 0 239 System command request channel -- r/w 120

31 0 239 System command reply channel -- r 120

32 0 69 M1: digital slave inputs 1(A)…31(A) and 1B…31B

(1 byte per slave) + M1 master flags (status AS-i master and exec.-ctl. flags and host flags)

DS2 r 35

33 0 149 M1: analogue slave inputs 1(A)…15(B) DS3 r 75


35 0 63 M1: digital slave outputs 1(A)…31(A) and 1B…31B

(1 byte per slave) DS5 r/w 32

36 0 119 M1: analogue slave outputs 1(A)…15(B) DS6 r/w 60


38 0 63 M1: status flags analogue outputs 1(A)…31(A) and 1B…31B DS8 r 32

39 0 31 M1: slave lists LAS, LDS, LPF, LCE DS9 r 16

40 0 7 M1: slave list LPS DS10 r 4

41 0 127 M1: current configuration data CDI DS11 r 64

42 0 127 M1: projected configuration data PCD DS12 r 64

43 0 63 M1: input parameter image DS13 r 32

44 0 63 M1: output parameter image DS14 r/w 32

46 0 143 M1: slave error counter, configuration error counter, AS-i cycle

counter DS15 r 72

47 0 23 M1: LCEMS, LCEAS, LDAE DS17 r 12

62 0 239 M1: command request channel -- r/w 120

63 0 239 M1: command reply channel -- r 120

64 0 69 M2: digital slave inputs 1(A)…31(A) and 1B…31B

(1 byte per slave) + M2 master flags (status AS-i master and exec.-ctl. flags and host flags)

DS2 r 35



67 0 63 M2: digital slave outputs 1(A)…31(A) and 1B…31B

(1 byte per slave) DS5 r/w 32



70 0 63 M2: status flags analogue outputs 1(A)…31(A) and 1B…31B DS8 r 32

71 0 31 M2: slave lists LAS, LDS, LPF, LCE DS9 r 16

72 0 7 M2: slave list LPS DS10 r 4

219



Attribute [dec]

from byte no.

[dec]

to byte no.

[dec]

Content DS Access r = read w = write

Number of

words

73 0 127 M2: current configuration data CDI DS11 r 64

74 0 127 M2: projected configuration data PCD DS12 r 64

75 0 63 M2: input parameter image DS13 r 32

76 0 63 M2: output parameter image DS14 r/w 32

78 0 143 M2: slave error counter, configuration error counter, AS-i cycle

counter DS15 r 72

79 0 23 M2: LCEMS, LCEAS, LDAE DS17 r 12

94 0 239 M2: command request channel -- r/w 120

95 0 239 M2: command reply channel -- r 120

Legend:

DS = M1 = M2 =

data set (→ Overview: acyclic data sets (→ page 221, → page 220)) AS-i master 1 AS-i master 2

220



>

Acyclic data records

Overview: Acyclic data sets ..................................................................................................................221 DS1 – System information ....................................................................................................................222 DS2 – Digital inputs of the slaves and master flags .............................................................................223 DS3 – Analogue inputs of slaves 1(A)...15(B) ......................................................................................224 DS4 – Analogue inputs of slaves 16(A)...31(B) ....................................................................................226 DS5 – Digital outputs of the slaves ......................................................................................................228 DS6 – Analogue outputs of slaves 1(A)...15(B)....................................................................................229 DS7 – Analogue outputs of slaves 16(A)...31(B)..................................................................................230 DS8 – Status of the analogue output data of the slaves 1...31 ............................................................231 DS9 – Slave lists LAS, LDS, LPF, LCE ................................................................................................233 DS10 – Slave list LPS ........................................................................................................................234 DS11 – Current configuration data CDI ................................................................................................235 DS12 – Projected configuration data PCD ...........................................................................................237 DS13 – Image of the input parameters of the slaves ...........................................................................239 DS14 – Image of the output parameters of the slaves .........................................................................240 DS15 – Slave error counter, configuration error counter, AS-i cycle counter ......................................241 DS17 – Error lists LCEMS, LCEAS, LDAE ...........................................................................................244 DS18 – Fieldbus information ................................................................................................................245

17036

The data records are transmitted acyclically upon request of the <fieldbus> master.

221



>

Overview: Acyclic data sets 17035

Data set no.


Words

DS1 System information r 26

DS2 Digital slave inputs 1(A)…31(A) and 1B…31B + master flags (status AS-i master and exec.-ctl. flags and host flags)

r 36

DS3 Analogue slave inputs 1(A)…15(B) r 75

DS4 Analogue slave inputs 16(A)…31(B) r 80

DS5 Digital slave outputs 1(A)…31(A) and 1B…31B r/w 32

DS6 Analogue slave outputs 1(A)…15(B) r/w 60

DS7 Analogue slave outputs 16(A)…31(B) r/w 64

DS8 Status flags analogue outputs 1(A)…31(A) and 1B…31B r 32

DS9 Slave lists LAS, LDS, LPF, LCE r 16

DS10 Slave lists LPS r 4

DS11 Current configuration data CDI r 64

DS12 Projected configuration data PCD r 64

DS13 Input parameter image r 32

DS14 Input parameter image r/w 32

DS15 Slave error counter, configuration error counter, AS-i cycle counter r 72

DS16 n.a. – –

DS17 Error lists LCEMS, LCEAS, LDAE r 12

DS18 Read fieldbus info (only available via CODESYS) r 19

DS19 n.a. – –

DS20 n.a. – –

222



>

DS1 – System information 8753

Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0 Article number 1) (byte 0) = "A" Article number 1) (byte 1) = “C"

1 Article number 1) (byte 2) = A1 Article number 1) (byte 3) = A2

2 Article number 1) (byte 4) = A3 Article number 1) (byte 5) = A4

3 Device number 2) (byte 1) = G1 Device number 2) (byte 0) = G2

4 Serial number 3) (byte 0, MSB) Serial number 3) (byte 1)

5 Serial number 3) (byte 2) Serial number 3) (byte 3)





10 Software type Software Version (Major Version)

11 Software Version (Minor Version) Software Version (Build Version)

12 Operating hours 5) Total (byte 3, high byte) Operating hours 5) Total (byte 2)

13 Operating hours 5) Total (byte 1) Operating hours 5) Total (byte 0, low byte)

14 Operating hours 5) Uptime (byte 3, high byte) Operating hours 5) Uptime (byte 2)

15 Operating hours 5) Uptime (byte 1) Operating hours 5) Uptime (byte 0, low byte)

16 Operating hours 5) PLC (byte 3, high byte) Operating hours 5) PLC (byte 2)

17 Operating hours 5) PLC (byte 1) Operating hours 5) PLC (byte 0, low byte)

18 Operating hours 5) display (byte 3, high byte) Operating hours 5) display (byte 2)

19 Operating hours 5) display (byte 1) Operating hours 5) display (byte 0, low byte)

20 Device temperature 6) (byte 0, high byte) Device temperature 6) (byte 1, low byte)

21 reserved Number of AS-i masters

22 Language 7) (1st letter) Language 7) (2nd letter)

23 Return to start screen (on/off) Screen saver (on/off)

24 CODESYS PLC operating mode (activ/inactiv) Output access

25 Device cycle in µs (high byte) Device cycle in µs (low byte)

1) Article number: "AC" + A1 + A2 + A3 + A4 as character string, e.g. "AC1401" or "AC402S" 2) Device number: G1 + G2 as character string, e.g. "AB" 3) Serial number: 12-digit character string 5) Operating hours: in seconds, Unsigned Double word (32 bit) 6) Device temperature: in 1/100 °C, signed Word (16 bit), e.g. 4232 = 42.32 °C 7) Language: LANG_ID as ASCII code, e.g. "DE" = "D" + "E" = 0x44 + 0x45

223



>

DS2 – Digital inputs of the slaves and master flags 8754

Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0 reserved Slave 1(A): D3...D0 reserved reserved

1 reserved Slave 3(A): D3...D0 reserved Slave 2(A): D3...D0















16 reserved Slave 1B: D3...D0 reserved reserved

17 reserved Slave 3B: D3...D0 reserved Slave 2B: D3...D0















32 AS-i master status flags (→ AS-i master status flags (→ page 140))

33 Execution control flags (→ Execution control flags (→ page 141))

34 Host flags (→ Host flags (→ page 142))

35 DAE / EE-Flags (→ DAE/EE flags (→ page 143))

224



>

DS3 – Analogue inputs of slaves 1(A)...15(B) 8756

Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0...4 Analogue input data of single slave 1 or of (slave 1A and slave 1B)















225



>

Details of the 5-word areas 8758

Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

n Analogue value channel 0 of single slave x or channel 0 of slave xA

n+1 Analogue value channel 1 of single slave x or channel 1 of slave xA

n+2 Analogue value channel 2 of single slave x or channel 0 of slave xB


n+4 TIB -- TIA -- TOB -- TOA -- O3 V3 O2 V2 O1 V1 O0 V0

Legend:

On overflow bit 1 bit 0 = data is in the valid range 1 = data is in the invalid range (especially in case of input modules when the measuring range is not reached or exceeded)

TIx transfer to the slave (transfer Input)

1 bit from master profile M4 onwards: 0 = slave transmits input data as a value (15 bits long, plus sign) 1 = slave transmits input data as a bit pattern (16 bits long, no sign)

TOx transfer from the slave (transfer output)

1 bit from master profile M4 onwards: 0 = slave receives output data as a value (15 bits long, plus sign) 1 = slave receives output data as a bit pattern (16 bits long, no sign)

Vn valid bit 1 bit 0 = values in channel n are invalid 1 = values in channel n are valid Output data must be valid (Vn = 1) to be enabled in the AS-i slave!

226



>

DS4 – Analogue inputs of slaves 16(A)...31(B) 8759

Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

















227



>

Details of the 5-word areas 8758

Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

n Analogue value channel 0 of single slave x or channel 0 of slave xA

n+1 Analogue value channel 1 of single slave x or channel 1 of slave xA



n+4 TIB -- TIA -- TOB -- TOA -- O3 V3 O2 V2 O1 V1 O0 V0

Legend:

On overflow bit 1 bit 0 = data is in the valid range 1 = data is in the invalid range (especially in case of input modules when the measuring range is not reached or exceeded)

TIx transfer to the slave (transfer Input)

1 bit from master profile M4 onwards: 0 = slave transmits input data as a value (15 bits long, plus sign) 1 = slave transmits input data as a bit pattern (16 bits long, no sign)



Vn valid bit 1 bit 0 = values in channel n are invalid 1 = values in channel n are valid Output data must be valid (Vn = 1) to be enabled in the AS-i slave!

228



>

DS5 – Digital outputs of the slaves 8761

Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0 reserved slave 1(A): D3...D0 reserved reserved
















16 reserved Slave 1B: D3...D0 reserved reserved
















>

229



DS6 – Analogue outputs of slaves 1(A)...15(B) 8763

Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0...3 analogue output data of single slave 1 or of (slave 1A and slave 1B)

4...7 Analogue output data of single slave 2 or of (slave 2A and slave 2B)














>

Details 4 channels per analogue slave 8765

The following table shows the structure of the data image to set the parameter:

Analogue channels per input slave = 4

Analogue channels per output slave = 4

Word Offset-Nr.

Content of the transferred word for parameter setting = 4 channels

n Mx / slave m(A) / channel

n+1 Mx / slave m(A) / channel



Legend:

n ... Number of 4 word blocks 1 = for setting 4 words ... 15 = for setting 60 words


m ... Numeric part of the selected AS-i slave address

>

230



DS7 – Analogue outputs of slaves 16(A)...31(B) 8766

Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0...3 analogue output data of single slave 16 or of (slave 16A and slave 16B)










40...43 Analogue output data of single slave 26 or of (slave 26 and slave 26B)





60...63 Analogue output data of single slave 31 or of (slave 31and slave 31B)

>

Details 4 channels per analogue slave 8765

The following table shows the structure of the data image to set the parameter:

Analogue channels per input slave = 4

Analogue channels per output slave = 4

Word Offset-Nr.

Content of the transferred word for parameter setting = 4 channels

n Mx / slave m(A) / channel

n+1 Mx / slave m(A) / channel



Legend:

n ... Number of 4 word blocks 1 = for setting 4 words ... 15 = for setting 60 words


m ... Numeric part of the selected AS-i slave address

231



>

DS8 – Status of the analogue output data of the slaves 1...31 8768

Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0 reserved

1 Status of the analogue output data of single slave 1 or of (slave 1A and slave 1B)































32 reserved

232



Details of the words shown above:

Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

n -- TOB -- TOA -- OVB -- OVA reserved

Legend:

OVx output valid 1 bit channel-independent bit "output data valid" from the slave:

CTT1: 0 = more than 3.5 s have elapsed since the last update of the output values 1 = slave requests new output data within the next 3 s

CTT2…CTT5: 0 = slave receives no new output data 1 = slave receives new output data

Only valid for analogue output slaves. For input slaves set OVx = "0"!



233



>

DS9 – Slave lists LAS, LDS, LPF, LCE 8770

Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0...3 LAS / list of active slaves

4...7 LDS / list of detected slaves

8...11 LPF / list of slaves with periphery faults

12...15 LCE / list of slaves with configuration errors

>

Details of the slave lists 8772

Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

n 15(A) 14(A) 13(A) 12(A) 11(A) 10(A) 9(A) 8(A) 7(A) 6(A) 5(A) 4(A) 3(A) 2(A) 1(A) 0 *)

n+1 31(A) 30(A) 29(A) 28(A) 27(A) 26(A) 25(A) 24(A) 23(A) 22(A) 21(A) 20(A) 19(A) 18(A) 17(A) 16(A)

n+2 15B 14B 13B 12B 11B 10B 9B 8B 7B 6B 5B 4B 3B 2B 1B res.

n+3 31B 30B 29B 28B 27B 26B 25B 24B 23B 22B 21B 20B 19B 18B 17B 16B

*) LAS and LPS have no slave 0, therefore this bit is set to 0!

234



>

DS10 – Slave list LPS 8773

Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0...3 List of projected slaves LPS

>

Details of the slave lists 8772

Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

n 15(A) 14(A) 13(A) 12(A) 11(A) 10(A) 9(A) 8(A) 7(A) 6(A) 5(A) 4(A) 3(A) 2(A) 1(A) 0 *)


n+2 15B 14B 13B 12B 11B 10B 9B 8B 7B 6B 5B 4B 3B 2B 1B res.


*) LAS and LPS have no slave 0, therefore this bit is set to 0!

235



>

DS11 – Current configuration data CDI 8775

Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

ID2 code ID1 code ID code IO code

0 Slave 0 *)

1 Slave 1(A)

2 Slave 2(A)

3 Slave 3(A)

4 Slave 4(A)

5 Slave 5(A)

6 Slave 6(A)

7 Slave 7(A)

8 Slave 8(A)

9 Slave 9(A)

10 Slave 10(A)

11 Slave 11(A)

12 Slave 12(A)

13 Slave 13(A)

14 Slave 14(A)

15 Slave 15(A)

16 Slave 16(A)

17 Slave 17(A)

18 Slave 18(A)

19 Slave 19(A)

20 Slave 20(A)

21 Slave 21(A)

22 Slave 22(A)

23 Slave 23(A)

24 Slave 24(A)

25 Slave 25(A)

26 Slave 26(A)

27 Slave 27(A)

28 Slave 28(A)

29 Slave 29(A)

20 Slave 30(A)

31 Slave 31(A)

32 reserved

33 Slave 1B

34 Slave 2B

236



Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0


35 Slave 3B

36 Slave 4B

37 Slave 5B

38 Slave 6B

39 Slave 7B

40 Slave 8B

41 Slave 9B

42 Slave 10B

43 Slave 11B

44 Slave 12B

45 Slave 13B

46 Slave 14B

47 Slave 15B

48 Slave 16B

49 Slave 17B

50 Slave 18B

51 Slave 19B

52 Slave 20B

53 Slave 21B

54 Slave 22B

55 Slave 23B

56 Slave 24B

57 Slave 25B

58 Slave 26B

59 Slave 27B

60 Slave 28B

61 Slave 29B

62 Slave 30B

63 Slave 31B

*) contents for slave 0 only valid in CDI

237



>

DS12 – Projected configuration data PCD 8779

Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0


0 reserved

1 Slave 1(A)

2 Slave 2(A)

3 Slave 3(A)

4 Slave 4(A)

5 Slave 5(A)

6 Slave 6(A)

7 Slave 7(A)

8 Slave 8(A)

9 Slave 9(A)

10 Slave 10(A)

11 Slave 11(A)

12 Slave 12(A)

13 Slave 13(A)

14 Slave 14(A)

15 Slave 15(A)

16 Slave 16(A)

17 Slave 17(A)

18 Slave 18(A)

19 Slave 19(A)

20 Slave 20(A)

21 Slave 21(A)

22 Slave 22(A)

23 Slave 23(A)

24 Slave 24(A)

25 Slave 25(A)

26 Slave 26(A)

27 Slave 27(A)

28 Slave 28(A)

29 Slave 29(A)

20 Slave 30(A)

31 Slave 31(A)

32 reserved

33 Slave 1B

34 Slave 2B

238



Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0


35 Slave 3B

36 Slave 4B

37 Slave 5B

38 Slave 6B

39 Slave 7B

40 Slave 8B

41 Slave 9B

42 Slave 10B

43 Slave 11B

44 Slave 12B

45 Slave 13B

46 Slave 14B

47 Slave 15B

48 Slave 16B

49 Slave 17B

50 Slave 18B

51 Slave 19B

52 Slave 20B

53 Slave 21B

54 Slave 22B

55 Slave 23B

56 Slave 24B

57 Slave 25B

58 Slave 26B

59 Slave 27B

60 Slave 28B

61 Slave 29B

62 Slave 30B

63 Slave 31B

239



>

DS13 – Image of the input parameters of the slaves 8781

Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0 reserved Slave 1(A): P3...P0 reserved reserved

1 reserved Slave 3(A): P3...P0 reserved Slave 2(A): P3...P0















16 reserved Slave 1B: P3...P0 reserved reserved

17 reserved Slave 3B: P3...P0 reserved Slave 2B: P3...P0















240



>

DS14 – Image of the output parameters of the slaves 8783

Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0 reserved Slave 1(A): P3...P0 reserved reserved
















16 reserved Slave 1B: P3...P0 reserved reserved
















241



>

DS15 – Slave error counter, configuration error counter, AS-i cycle counter 8785

Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0 Error counter in slave 0

1 Error counter in slave 1(A)































32 reserved

33 Error counter in slave 1B




242



Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0




























64 AS-i cycle counter

65 Configuration error counter

66 AS-i error status

67 Telegram error rate

68 Message error counter

69 Voltage error counter 22.5V

70 Voltage error counter 19V

71 Earth fault counter

243



Legend:

AS-i error status ... Bit 0: Bit 1: Bit 2: Bit 3: Bit 4: Bit 8: Bit 9: Bit 10: Bit 11: Bit 12: Bit 13: Bit 14: Bit 15:

Configuration error type 1 (missing slave) Configuration error type 2 (too many slaves) Configuration error type 3 (slave with wrong profile) Peripheral fault Double address internal AS-i master error Projection mode Slave address 0 detected Earth fault Voltage drop below 22.5 V Voltage drop below 19.0 V reserved reserved

Telegram error rate ... Number of faulty telegrams during the past 2000 telegram cycles

Symmetry ... AS-i symmetry from -100% to +100%, 0% = symmetrical-to-ground Bit15: bit with sign

244



>

DS17 – Error lists LCEMS, LCEAS, LDAE 15911

Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0...3 LCEMS (list of configuration errors - missing slaves)

4...7 LCEAS (list of configuration errors - additional slaves)

8...11 LDAE (list of double address errors)

>

Details of the error lists 6658

The error lists (LCEMS, LCEAS, LDAE) have a size of 64 bits each. The respective bits each represent a slave address:

Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

n 15(A) 14(A) 13(A) 12(A) 11(A) 10(A) 9(A) 8(A) 7(A) 6(A) 5(A) 4(A) 3(A) 2(A) 1(A) 0


n+2 15B 14B 13B 12B 11B 10B 9B 8B 7B 6B 5B 4B 3B 2B 1B -


245



>

DS18 – Fieldbus information 17038

Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0 Fieldbus state Fieldbus type

1 Ethernet connection status Profibus slave address

2 Profinet/EtherNet/IP IP address (byte 2) Profinet/EtherNet/IP IP address (byte 1, MSB)

3 Profinet/EtherNet/IP IP address (byte 4, LSB) Profinet/EtherNet/IP IP address (byte 3)

4 Profinet/EtherNet/IP subnet mask (byte 2) Profinet/EtherNet/IP subnet mask (byte 1, MSB)

5 Profinet/EtherNet/IP subnet mask (byte 4, LSB) Profinet/EtherNet/IP subnet mask (byte 3)

6 Profinet/EtherNet/IP gateway address (byte 2) Profinet/EtherNet/IP gateway address (byte 1, MSB)

7 Profinet/EtherNet/IP gateway address (byte 4, LSB) Profinet/EtherNet/IP gateway address (byte 3)

8 MAC0 (byte 2) MAC0 (byte 1, LSB)

9 MAC0 (byte 4) MAC0 (byte 3)

10 MAC0 (byte 6, MSB) MAC0 (byte 5)



13 MAC1 (byte 6, MSB) MAC1 (byte 5)



16 MAC2 (byte 6, MSB) MAC2 (byte 1, LSB)

17 Profinet host address (byte 2) Profinet host address (byte 1, MSB)

18 Profinet host address (byte 4, LSB) Profinet host address (byte 3)

Legend:

Fieldbus type

Name of the fieldbus 1 byte 0x00 = no fieldbus present 0x01 = Profinet 0x02 = Profibus 0x03 = EtherNet/IP

Fieldbus status

Status of the fieldbus connection

1 byte 0x00 = initialisation 0x01 = waiting for connection 0x02 = connection is being established 0x03 = configuration of the connection in progress 0x04 = parameter setting in progress 0x05 = waiting for module configuration 0x06 = cyclic data exchange with the fieldbus controller/host 0x07 = connection establishment

Profibus slave address

Profibus address of the device

1 byte 0x00 = no Profibus? 0x03 = address 3 ... 0x7B = address 123

Ethernet connection status

Status and Ethernet connections on ports X6 and X7

1 byte 0x00 = no connection 0x01 = connection on port X7 established, no connection on port X6 0x02 = connection on port X6 established, no connection on port X7 0x03 = connection on ports X6 and X7 established

246



Profinet/ EtherNet/IP IP address

IP address of the device 4 bytes One address segment per byte. e.g. 192.168.0.102 Byte 1: 192 = 0xC0 Byte 2: 168 = 0xA8 Byte 3: 0 = 0x00 Byte 4: 102 = 0x66

Profinet/ EtherNet/IP- Subnet mask

Subnet mask of the Ethernet network

4 bytes see Profinet/EtherNet/IP IP address

Profinet/ EtherNet/IP gateway address

IP address of the EtherNet gateway


MAC0 MAC0-ID of the device 6 bytes One MAC segment per byte: e.g. 00:02:01:01:98:D2 Byte 1: D2 ... Byte 6: 00

For EtherNet/IP, MAC0 = 00:00:00:00:00:00.

MAC1 MAC1-ID of the device 6 bytes see MAC0

MAC2 MAC2-ID of the device 6 bytes see MAC0

MAC 1 equals MAC2

Profinet host address

IP address of the Profinet host


No host address is displayed in EtherNet/IP

247



>

Command channels

Principle of the command channels .....................................................................................................248 System commands ...............................................................................................................................249 AS-i master commands ........................................................................................................................268

16573

248



>

Principle of the command channels 13543

A command channel consists of a request channel and a response channel.

Command request channel (fieldbus master >>> device)

Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 user ID

2 command number

3...120 command parameters

Command response channel (device >>> fieldbus master)

Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 reflected user ID

2 reflected command number

3 reserved Command status (→ page 248)

4 command error code

5...120 reply data to the command

Unused bytes receive invalid values from old command replies. DO NOT evaluate!

>

Command status 8795

Status Status code [hex]

Description

OK 00 Command execution was successful. Response data is available and valid.

FAILED 01 Error when executing the command. The exact cause of the error occurred is stated in the command-specific error code. The response data is invalid.

TO 02 Timeout error: The command was cancelled due to timeout.

UC 03 Unknown Command: The transmitted command number is not known in the system.

NOP 04 Not valid parameter: The transmitted command parameter is invalid.

249



>

System commands

Overview: System commands ..............................................................................................................250 Command 257 (0x0101) – Quick setup AS-i master 1 + 2...................................................................251 Command 259 (0x0103) – Select user language .................................................................................253 Command 260 (0x0104) – Change display settings ............................................................................255 Command 261 (0x0105) – Set output control ......................................................................................256 Command 262 (0x0106) – Set PLC operating mode ...........................................................................257 Command 265 (0x0109) – Set date/time .............................................................................................258 Command 266 (0x010A) – Set parameters of the NTP server ............................................................260 Command 267 (0x010B) – Read date / time / NTP settings ................................................................262 Command 268 (0x010C) – Reboot system ..........................................................................................264 Command 269 (0x010D) – Read fieldbus info .....................................................................................266 Command 272 (0x0110) – Display target visualisation ........................................................................267

11077

250



>

Overview: System commands 11078

Comm. no. [hex]

Comm. no. [dec]

Description

0101 257 Quick setup AS-i master 1 (and AS-i master 2, if available)

0103 259 Change the user language

0104 260 Change the display settings

0105 261 Configure the output access

0106 262 Set the PLC operating mode

0109 265 Set the date / time

010A 266 Set the NTP server parameters

010B 267 Read date / time / NTP settings

010C 268 Reboot the system

010D 269 Read fieldbus information (can only be executed in CODESYS!)

0110 272 Display target visualization

251



>

Command 257 (0x0101) – Quick setup AS-i master 1 + 2 11079

>

Command request channel (fieldbus master >>> device) 11080

Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 UID

2 command number

3 reserved reserved M2 M1

4 ...120 The area is completely ignored.

It does not matter whether the data area exists or what data is contained.

Legend:

M1 AS-i master 1 1 bit 0 = "Quick set-up" command is NOT executed on the master 1 = "Quick set-up" command is executed on the master

M2 AS-i master 2 1 bit 0 = "Quick set-up" command is NOT executed on the master 1 = "Quick set-up" command is executed on the master

UID user ID 1 word 0x0000…0xFFFF = 0…65535 The user ID ensures clear identification of the commmand response data of the command request data sent before. The user can assign any user ID in the command request. The AS-i master reflects the user ID from the command request into the corresponding command response.

The command "blocks" further processing as long as the quick set-up needs. That means that the WRREC command signals "busy" until the function result is available. This may take a few seconds.

252



>

Command response channel (device >>> fieldbus master) 11081

Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 reflected user ID



4 command error code AS-i master 2

Possible command error codes (→ page 252) command error code AS-i master 1

Possible command error codes (→ page 252)

>

Possible command error codes 11087

Error Code [hex]

Error Meaning

0x00 no error

0x03 SD0 slave with address 0 connected

0x04 IM - no master M1 and/or M2 specified or: - master M2 does not exist (for units with 1 AS-i master)

When the Quick Setup is not executed for an AS-i master, the return value is always 0x00 (= OK).

The command status has the value Failed when one of the errors is present on AS-i master 1

or 2 after command execution.

253



>

Command 259 (0x0103) – Select user language 11089

Via the command the user lanaguage for the local HMI and the web interface can be set. The language setting always refers to both user interfaces. >


Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 UID

2 command number

3 LANG_ID

4 ... 120 The area is completely ignored.


Legende:

MSG_ID User language 1 word 0x0000 = no language selection, only return active language 0x4445 = DE, German 0x454E = EN, English (default) 0x4652 = FR, French 0x4954 = IT, Italian 0x4553 = ES, Spanish 0x5054 = PT, Portuguese


254



>


Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 reflected user ID




5 current LANG_ID

>


Error Code [hex]

Error Meaning

0x00 no error

0x01 IL Language is unknown or not available in this software version

Error code only appears if command status = FAILED.

The error code 0x01 appears when querying the currently set language (LANG_ID = 0x0000).

This is to be interpreted as correct processing of the command.

255



>

Command 260 (0x0104) – Change display settings 11099

>


Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 UID

2 command number

3 reserved reserved RS DS



Legend:

DS Screen saver 1 bit 0 = no screen saver for local display 1 = screen saver for local display activated

RS return to splash screen 1 bit 0 = when the time has elapsed, device remains on current page 1 = when the time has elapsed, devices changes to the splash screen


>


Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 reflected user ID




>


There are no error messages for this command.

256



>

Command 261 (0x0105) – Set output control 16673

Using this command, the controller instance for the outputs of the AS-i slaves can be set. >


Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 UID

2 command number

3 reserved OC



Legend:

OC Output Control 1 byte 0x01 = GW, gateway 0x02 = MAN, manual 0x03 = PLC, device-internal PLC

>


Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 reflected user ID




>


Error Code [hex]

Error Meaning

0x00 no error

0x01 IO Invalid parameter value transmitted for OC. OR: Control of the outputs could not be set.


257



>

Command 262 (0x0106) – Set PLC operating mode 16674

Using this command, the operating mode of the device-internal PLC can be set. >


Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 UID

2 command number

3 reserved reserved PLC



Legend:

PLC Operating mode of the device-internal PLC

1 bit 0x00 = stop PLC application and switch off PLC 0x01 = switch on PLC and start PLC application (boot application)

>


Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 reflected user ID




>


Error Code [hex]

Error Meaning

0x00 no error

0x01 PF PLC operating mode could not be set.


258



>

Command 265 (0x0109) – Set date/time 16677

Using this command, the system time (date and time) of the device can be set. >


Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 UID

2 command number

3 month day

4 year (byte 2, MSB) year (byte 1, LSB)

5 minutes hours

6 reserved seconds



Legend:

day day 1 byte 0x01 = 1 0x02 = 2 ... 0x1F = 31

month month 1 byte 0x01 = January 0x02 = February ... 0x0C = December

Year Year 1 word Possible values: 1971 ... 2037

0x07B3 = 1971 0x07B4 = 1972 ... 0x07F5 = 2037

Example: 2014 = 0x07DE year (MSB) = 0x07, year (LSB) = 0xDE

hours hours 1 byte 0x00 = 0 0x01 = 1 ... 0x17 = 23

minutes minutes 1 byte 0x00 = 0 0x01 = 1 ... 0x3B = 59

seconds seconds 1 byte 0x00 = 0 0x01 = 1 ... 0x3B = 59

259



>


Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 reflected user ID




>


Error Code [hex]

Error Meaning

0x00 no error

0x01 IDT Transferred values for date/time are invalid and could not be set. Error

0x02 NAE NTP is active, transmitted value for time could not be set.

Deactivate NTP to be able to set the time.

Error code appears if command status = FAILED

260



>

Command 266 (0x010A) – Set parameters of the NTP server 16707

Using this command, the IP parameters of the NTP server can be set. >


Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 UID

2 command number

3 NTP Offset reserved NTP

4 NTP server IP address (high byte, net address) NTP server IP address

5 NTP server IP address NTP server IP address (low byte, host address)



Legend:

NTP Setting the NTP client 1 bit 0x0 = NTP client is inactive 0x1 = NTP client is active

NTP Offset NTP server provides the time in UTC. NTP Offset indicates the difference between UTC and local time.

1 byte 0x00 = system clock in local time 0x01 = UTC -12:00 0x02 = UTC -11:00 0x03 = UTC -10:00 0x04 = UTC -09:00 0x05 = UTC -08:00 0x06 = UTC -07:00 0x07 = UTC -06:00 0x08 =.UTC -05:00 0x09 = UTC -04:00 0x0A = UTC -03:30 0x0B = UTC -03:00 0x0C = UTC -02:00 0x0D = UTC -01:00 0x0E = UTC +00:00 0x0F = UTC +01:00 0x10 = UTC +02:00 0x11 = UTC +03:00 0x12 = UTC +03:30 0x13 = UTC +04:00 0x14 = UTC +04:30 0x15 = UTC +05:00 0x16 = UTC +05:30 0x17 = UTC +05:45 0x18 = UTC +06:00 0x19 = UTC +06:30 0x1A = UTC +07:00 0x1B = UTC +08:00 0x1C = UTC +09:00 0x1D = UTC +09:30 0x1E = UTC +10:00 0x1F = UTC +11:00 0x20 = UTC +12:00

261



NTP server IP address

IP address (IP-V4) of the NTP server

2 words Per segment of an IP address: 0 ....255

0x00 = 000 0x01 = 001 ... 0x0FF = 255

Example: IP address: 192.168.150.5 192 = 0xC0 (high byte) 168 = 0xA8 150 = 0x96 005 = 0x05 (low byte)

The duration of the synchronisation process depends on the settings of the NTP server. This means that the synchronised system time is not immediately available after activation of the NTP client.

► Do not query the synchronised system time immediately after activation of the NTP client.

>


Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 reflected user ID




>


Error Code [hex]

Error Meaning

0x00 no error

0x01 IS Wrong parameters transmitted. NTP server settings were not transmitted.


262



>

Command 267 (0x010B) – Read date / time / NTP settings 16679

Using this command, the current values for time, date and NTP settings can be read. >


Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 UID

2 command number



263



>


Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 reflected user ID




5 month day

6 year (byte 2, MSB) year (byte 1, LSB)

7 minutes hours

8 reserved seconds

9 NTP Offset reserved NTP

10 NTP server IP address (high byte, net address) NTP server IP address

11 NTP server IP address NTP server IP address (low byte, host address)

Legend:

- day - month - year - hours - minutes - seconds

→ Command 266 (0x010A) – Set parameters of the NTP server (→ page 260)

- NTP - NTP Offset - NTP server IP address

→ Command 266 (0x010A) – Set parameters of the NTP server (→ page 260)

>


Error Code [hex]

Error Meaning

0x00 no error

264



>

Command 268 (0x010C) – Reboot system 16680

Using the command, the device can be restarted. >


Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 UID

2 command number

3 0x4F (= O) 0x42 (= B)

4 0x54 (= T) 0x4F (= O)



Legend:


To prevent an unintended or unauthorised restart of the system by calling the command 0x010C, a signature must be transmitted in addition. The command execution is stopped when

a wrong signature is transmitted.

The signature is: BOOT

265



>


Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 reflected user ID




>


Error Code [hex]

Error Meaning

0x01 Command error: Reboot could not be carried out.


266



>

Command 269 (0x010D) – Read fieldbus info 7052

The command reads information via the fieldbus.

The command can only be executed using the function block ACnnnn_SysCmd under CODESYS! (→ programming manual, section ACnnnn_SysCmd)

>


Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 UID

2 command number



>


Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 reflected user ID




5 ... 23 → DS18 – Fieldbus information (→ page 245)

>


Error Code [hex]

Error Meaning

0x00 no error

267



>

Command 272 (0x0110) – Display target visualisation 20593

This command enables switching between the menu page of the GUI and the target visualisation as well as enables/disables the use of the key combination [] + []. >


Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 UID

2 command number

3 TargetVisu

4 Hotkey

5...120 The area is completely ignored. It does not matter whether the data area exists or what data is contained.

Legend:

TargetVisu Content of the device display

1 Word 0x0000 = display GUI 0x0001 = display target visualisation

Hotkey Key combination for switching from target visualisation to the menu page of the GUI

1 Word 0x0000 = key combination enabled 0x0001 = key combination disabled

>

Command reply channel (device >>> fieldbus master) 20595

Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 reflected user ID




>


Error Code [hex]

Error Meaning

0x00 no error

0x01 Target visualisation cannot be displayed because CODESYS PLC is not active


268



>

AS-i master commands

Overview: AS-i master commands .......................................................................................................269 Error codes of the AS-i master commands ..........................................................................................271 Command 01 (0x0001) – Change parameters of an AS-i slave ..........................................................274 Command 03 (0x0003) – Project the currrent AS-i network ................................................................276 Command 04 (0x0004) – Change LPS ................................................................................................277 Command 05 (0x0005) – Change the operating mode of the AS-i master ..........................................278 Command 06 (0x0006) – Change AS-i slave address .........................................................................279 Command 07 (0x0007) - Set the auto address mode of the AS-i master ..........................................281 Command 09 (0x0009) – Change extended ID1 in the AS-i slave ......................................................282 Command 10 (0x000A) - Change PCD ................................................................................................284 Command 13 (0x000D) – AS-i master supply voltage, symmetry, earth fault .....................................287 Command 21 (0x0015) – Read ID string of an AS-i profile (S-7.4) ......................................................289 Command 26 (0x001A) – Read AS-i master info .................................................................................292 Command 28 (0x001C) – Deactivate slave reset when changing to the protected mode ...................293 Command 33 (0x0021) - Read diagnosis string of an AS-i slave (S-7.4) ............................................294 Command 34 (0x0022) - Read parameter string of an AS-i slave (S-7.4) ...........................................296 Command 35 (0x0022) - Write parameter string of an AS-i slave (S-7.4) ...........................................298 Command 36 (0x0024) – CTT2 Standard ............................................................................................300 Command 37 (0x0025) – CTT2 standard write ....................................................................................302 Command 38 (0x0026) – CTT2 Vendor Specific Read ........................................................................304 Command 39 (0x0027) – CTT2 Vendor Specific Write ........................................................................306 Command 64 (0x0040) – CTT2 device group read ..............................................................................308 Command 65 (0x0041) – CTT2 Device Group Write ...........................................................................310 Command 66 (0x0042) – CTT2 Vendor Specific Selective Read From Buffer ....................................312 Command 67 (0x0043) – CTT2 Vendor Specific Selective Write From Buffer ....................................314 Command 68 (0x0044) – CTT2 Vendor Specific Selective Read ........................................................316 Command 69 (0x0045) – CTT2 Vendor Specific Selective Write ........................................................318 Command 70 (0x0046) – CTT2 device group selective Rread ............................................................320 Command 71 (0x0047) – CTT2 Device Group Selective Write ...........................................................322 Command 73 (0x0049) – CTT2 Vendor Specific Exchange ................................................................324 Command 74 (0x004A) – CTT2 Device Group Exchange ...................................................................326 Command 75 (0x004B) – CTT2 Device Group Selective Read From Buffer .......................................328 Command 76 (0x004C) – CTT2 Device Group Selective Write From Buffer .......................................330 Command 80 (0x0050) – Adjust AS-i master settings .........................................................................332 Command 81 (0x0051) – Reset error counter......................................................................................333

8797

269



>

Overview: AS-i master commands 7250

Command [hex]

Command [dec]

Description Note

0001 1 write parameters to a connected AS-i slave

0003 3

adopt and save currently connected AS-i slaves in the configuration

This command causes a reset of the fieldbus connection. The device must be rebooted!

ConfDataInput Slave → Projected Configuration Data and LDS → LPS

0004 4 Change the list of the projected AS-i slaves (LPS)

0005 5 set the operating mode of the AS-i master

0006 6 readdress a connected AS-i slave

0007 7 set the auto addressing mode of the AS-i master

0009 9 change the extended ID code 1 in the connected AS-i slave

000A 10 change PCD

000D 13 AS-i master supply voltage, symmetry, earth fault

0015 21 read ID string of an AS-i slave with profile S-7.4 Slave profile S-7.4

0019 25 Set test mode

001A 26 read AS-i master info

001C 28 Deactivation of the slave reset when changing to the protected mode

0021 33 read diagnosis string of an AS-i slave with profile S-7.4 Slave profile S-7.4

0022 34 read parameter string of an AS-i slave with profile S-7.4 Slave profile S-7.4

0023 35 write parameter string of an AS-i slave with profile S-7.4 Slave profile S-7.4

0024 36 CTT2 standard read: Acyclic standard read call of an AS-i slave with CTT2 profile

CTT2 slave profile *)

0025 37 CTT2 standard write: Acyclic standard write call of an AS-i slave with CTT2 profile


0026 38 CTT2 vendor specific read: acyclic manufacturer-specific read call of an AS-i slave with CTT2 profile


0027 39 CTT2 vendor specific write: acyclic manufacturer-specific write call of an AS-i slave with CTT2 profile


0040 64 CTT2 device group read: Acyclic devicegroup read call of an AS-i slave with CTT2 profile


0041 65 CTT2 device group write: Acyclic devicegroup write call of an AS-i slave with CTT2 profile


0042 66 CTT2 vendor specific selective read from buffer: Selective standard read call of an AS-i slave with CTT2 profile


0043 67 CTT2 vendor specific selective write from buffer: Selective standard write call of an AS-i slave with CTT2 profile


0044 68 CTT2 vendor specific selective read: Selective manufacturer-specific read call of an AS-i slave with CTT2 profile


0045 69 CTT2 vendor specific selective write: Selective manufacturer-specific write call of an AS-i slave with CTT2 profile


270



Command [hex]

Command [dec]

Description Note

0046 70 CTT2 device group selective read: Selective devicegroup read call of an AS-i slave with CTT2 profile


0047 71 CTT2 device group selective write: Selective devicegroup write call of an AS-i slave with CTT2 profile


0049 73 CTT2 vendor specific exchange: Manufacturer-specific data exchange with an AS-i slave with CTTS profile


004A 74 CTT2 device group exchange: Devicegroup data exchange with an AS-i slave with CTTS profile


004B 75 CTT2 device group selective read from buffer: Manufacturer-specific write/read call of an AS-i slave with CTTS profile


004C 76 CTT2 device group selective write from buffer: Devicegroup write/read call of an AS-i slave with CTTS profile


0050 80 Set AS-i master parameters

0051 81 Reset error counter

Legend:

CTT → chapter Combined transaction – Use of analogue channels in the gateway depending on the slave profile (→ page 153) *) CTT2 profiles = S-7.5.5, S-7.A.5 or S-B.A.5

271



>

Error codes of the AS-i master commands

General error codes ..............................................................................................................................272 Standard CTT2 error codes ..................................................................................................................273 CTT2 error object .................................................................................................................................273

8836

272



>

General error codes 5682

Revision: 2014-03-05

Error Code [hex]

Error Meaning

0x01 NOK no slave response OR: master is in the offline mode when requesting the command

0x02 SND no slave with the old address found


0x04 SD2 slave with the new address already exists

0x05 DE error when deleting the old address

0x06 error when reading the IO configuration

0x07 SE error when writing the new address or extended ID code 1

0x08 AT new address could only be saved temporarily

0x09 ET extended ID code 1 could only be saved temporarily

0x0A NA the slave is not in the LAS

0x0B ID parameter or address invalid

0x0C faulty S-7.4 protocol sequence

0x0D ST S-7.4 protocol aborted (timeout)

0x0E IA invalid AS-i slave address for the S-7.4 protocol (e.g. B slaves)

0x0F SSA AS-i slave has aborted the S-7.4 string

0x10 AS-i S-7.4 no longer connected (no longer in LAS)

0x11 STA another S-7.4 transfer to the addressed AS-i slave is already active

0x12 HSE the previous segmented S-7.4 transfer was not yet completed

0x13 IDL invalid S-7.4 data length

0x14 master is in the wrong operating mode *)

0x16 timeout during command processing

0x17 CMD_PRE start requirements for S-7.4 command not met: - wrong slave profile (is not S-7.4) or: - slave is not in LAS or: - master is not in the Protected mode

0x18 NM master is not in the protected mode

0x19 master is not in projection mode

0x20 command could not be processed within the specified time

0xE0...0xEF CTT2 error detected by AS-i slave; CTT2 error codes (→ page 273)

0xF0 invalid CTT2 command

0xF1 invalid CTT2 response

0xF2 S-7.5 data length longer than 30 bytes

273



>

Standard CTT2 error codes 8931

The "standard CTT2 error code" provides information about errors occurred during processing of a CTT2 command. It is transmitted in data byte 0 of the response channel of a CTT2 command. The following table shows the possible values:

Error code Description

0x00 No fault

0x01 Invalid index

0x02 Invalid length

0x03 Command not implemented

0x04 Used, the command could not be completed in the specified time

0x05 Command was not acknowledged

0x06 Invalid sub-index

0x07 Command 'Selective Read Request' is missing

>

CTT2 error object 18393

In addition to the standard CTT2 error code, the "CTT2 error object" provides further manufacturer-specific information about errors which occurred during processing of a CTT2 command. It is transmitted in the response channel of a CTT2 command in the data bytes 0...5. The CTT2 error object has the following structure:

Data byte Content

0 standard CTT2 error code (→ standard CTT2 error codes (→ page 273))

1...4 manufacturer-specific error information (→ data sheet of the AS-i slave)

274



>

Command 01 (0x0001) – Change parameters of an AS-i slave 8799

Requirement: The addressed AS-i master must be in the protected mode.

Command 05 (0x0005) – Change the operating mode of the AS-i master (→ page 278)

>


Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 UID

2 command number

3 reserved reserved ST SLA

4 reserved reserved New output parameter

5...120 The area is completely ignored.


Legend:

SLA slave address 5 bits 0x00…0x1F = 0…31

ST slave type 1 bit 0 = single slave or A slave 1 = B slave (= addition of 0x20 or 32 to the slave address)


If the requested slave address (SLA) is not in the list of activated slaves (LAS), the new parameters are stored in the AS-i master despite error message (error code 0x0A). If an AS-i slave with this address is added to the AS-i network at a later point, the slave automatically adopts the saved parameters.

275



>


Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 reflected user ID




5 reserved reserved Input parameters



>


Error Code [hex]

Error Meaning

0x00 no error


0x0A NA the slave is not in the LAS

0x0B ID parameter or address invalid



276



>

Command 03 (0x0003) – Project the currrent AS-i network 8805

(= project all)

Requirement: The addressed AS-i master must be in the projection mode.


This command causes a reset of the fieldbus connection. The device must be rebooted!

>


Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 UID

2 command number



Legende:


>


Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 reflected user ID




>


Error Code [hex]

Error Meaning

0x00 no error



277



>

Command 04 (0x0004) – Change LPS 8806



>


Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 UID

2 command number

3 15(A) 14(A) 13(A) 12(A) 11(A) 10(A) 9(A) 8(A) 7(A) 6(A) 5(A) 4(A) 3(A) 2(A) 1(A) --


5 15B 14B 13B 12B 11B 10B 9B 8B 7B 6B 5B 4B 3B 2B 1B --




Legend:


>


Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 reflected user ID




>


Error Code [hex]

Error Meaning

0x00 no error


278



>

Command 05 (0x0005) – Change the operating mode of the AS-i master 8807

>


Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 UID

2 command number

3 reserved MOD



Legend:

MOD operating mode 1 byte 0x00 = set master to the normal mode (protected mode) 0x01 = set master to the projection mode


>


Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 reflected user ID




>


Error Code [hex]

Error Meaning

0x00 no error


279



>

Command 06 (0x0006) – Change AS-i slave address 8808



>


Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 UID

2 command number

3 reserved reserved ST old SLA

4 reserved reserved ST new SLA



Legend:




280



>


Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 reflected user ID




>


Error Code [hex]

Error Meaning

0x00 no error




0x04 SD2 slave with the new address already exists


0x06 error when reading the extended ID code 1


0x08 AT new address could only be saved temporarily



281



>

Command 07 (0x0007) - Set the auto address mode of the AS-i master 8811

>


Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 UID

2 command number

3 reserved AutoAd



Legend:

AutoAd automatic addressing 1 byte 00 = deactivate automatic addressing 01 = activate automatic addressing


>


Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 reflected user ID




>



282



>

Command 09 (0x0009) – Change extended ID1 in the AS-i slave 8812

>


Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 UID

2 command number


4 reserved new Extended ID-Code 1



Legend:




283



>


Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 reflected user ID




>


Error Code [hex]

Error Meaning

0x00 no error




0x06 error when reading the extended ID code 1



0x0E IA invalid AS-i slave address 0 or 0B, or address 0 indicated twice


0x21 invalid ID code 1 (if bit 3 is set for A/B slave)

284



>

Command 10 (0x000A) - Change PCD 8814

>


Offset Word no.

Bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

ID2-Code ID1-Code ID-Code IO-Code

1 UID

2 command number

3 reserved

4 Slave 1(A)

5 Slave 2(A)

6 Slave 3(A)

7 Slave 4(A)

8 Slave 5(A)

9 Slave 6(A)

10 Slave 7(A)

11 Slave 8(A)

12 Slave 9(A)

13 Slave 10(A)

14 Slave 11(A)

15 Slave 12(A)

16 Slave 13(A)

17 Slave 14(A)

18 Slave 15(A)

19 Slave 16(A)

20 Slave 17(A)

21 Slave 18(A)

22 Slave 19(A)

23 Slave 20(A)

24 Slave 21(A)

25 Slave 22(A)

26 Slave 23(A)

27 Slave 24(A)

28 Slave 25(A)

29 Slave 26(A)

30 Slave 27(A)

31 Slave 28(A)

32 Slave 29(A)

33 Slave 30(A)

285



Offset Word no.

Bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

ID2-Code ID1-Code ID-Code IO-Code

34 Slave 31(A)

35 reserved

36 Slave 1B

37 Slave 2B

38 Slave 3B

39 Slave 4B

40 Slave 5B

41 Slave 6B

42 Slave 7B

43 Slave 8B

44 Slave 9B

45 Slave 10B

46 Slave 11B

47 Slave 12B

48 Slave 13B

49 Slave 14B

50 Slave 15B

51 Slave 16B

52 Slave 17B

53 Slave 18B

54 Slave 19B

55 Slave 20B

56 Slave 21B

57 Slave 22B

58 Slave 23B

59 Slave 24B

60 Slave 25B

61 Slave 26B

62 Slave 27B

63 Slave 28B

64 Slave 29B

65 Slave 30B

66 Slave 31B



286



Legend:


>


Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 reflected user ID




>


Error Code [hex]

Error Meaning

0x00 no error


287



>

Command 13 (0x000D) – AS-i master supply voltage, symmetry, earth fault 8815

>


Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 UID

2 command number



Legende:


288



>


Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 reflected user ID




5 reserved reserved PF1 PF2 SE EF PM PS

6 Voltage ASi+ to ASi- in [mV]

7 Voltage FE to ASi- in [mV]

8 Symmetry (-100...100) in [%]



Legend:

EF earth fault 1 bit 0 = no earth fault is detected 1 = asymmetric supply voltage; classified as earth fault

PF1 powerfail 22.5 V 1 bit 0 = no AS-i Power Fail (classic APF)

1 = AS-i voltage < 22.5 V There is an AS-i power fail (classic APF)

PF2 powerfail 19 V 1 bit 0 = no AS-i Power Fail (24V APF)

1 = AS-i voltage < 19 V There is an AS-i power fail (24V APF)

PM powermodule 1 bit 0 = no data decoupling module is connected 1 = a data decoupling module is connected

PS powersource 1 bit 0 = the device is supplied from AUX 1 = the device is supplied from AS-i

SE status earth fault detection

1 bit 0 = no earth fault detection possible (e.g. no AS-i voltage) 1 = earth fault detection provides valid data

>



289



>

Command 21 (0x0015) – Read ID string of an AS-i profile (S-7.4) 8822

>


Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 UID

2 command number




Legende:




290



>


Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 reflected user ID




5 Number of bytes received as from word no. 4 reserved ST reflected slave address

6 I/O 2D DT Start DT Count Mux field E type

7 number of parameter bytes to be read EDT Read reserved Diag reserved

8 EDT Write reserved Number of parameter bytes to be written

9 Device-specific information Manufacturer identification

10...m Device-specific information Device-specific information

(m+1)...120 The area is completely ignored.


Legend:

2D double data transfer 1 bit double data transfer (redundancy) possible

0 = simple data transfer 1 = double data transfer

number of parameter bytes to be read

1 byte number of bytes which can be read as parameter string

00 = no parameter string readable 01...DBhex = 01...219dec = number of bytes

number of parameter bytes to be written

1 byte number of bytes which can be written as parameter string

00 = no parameter string readable 01...DBhex = 01...219dec = number of bytes

Diag slave supports the 7.4 diagnosis string

1 bit 0 = diagnosis string is not supported 1 = diagnosis string is supported

DT-Count number of data triples 3 bits (information for the driver in the master)

DT-Start start triple 3 bits (information for the driver in the master)

E type slave function + data structure

5 bits characterises the slave as regards functionality and data structure

00 = reserved 01 = transmitted values are measured values 02 = transmitted values are 16 digital bit values 03 = normal operation in 4-bit mode (4I/4O) 04...1Fhex = 04...31dec = reserved

EDT read reserved 3 bits reserved for later profiles

EDT write reserved 3 bits reserved for later profiles

device-specific information

1 byte as an option more bytes for the manufacturer-specific device description

manufacturer identification

1 byte defined manufacturer number assigned by AS-International

I/O direction of data 1 bit direction of data for the devices with E type 3

0 = input 1 = output

Mux field number of multiplexed data words

3 bits 0…3 number = value in "Mux field" +1

291




>


Error Code [hex]

Error Meaning

0x00 no error




0x10 AS-i S-7.4 slave deleted from LAS during current transmission



292



>

Command 26 (0x001A) – Read AS-i master info 8827

>


Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 UID

2 command number



Legende:


>


Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 reflected user ID




5 M12 reserved

6 Master firmware version, places before the decimal point

7 Master firmware version, decimal places



Legend:

M12 number of AS-i masters 1 byte 0x00 = device has 1 AS-i master 0x01 = device has 2 AS-i masters

>



293



>

Command 28 (0x001C) – Deactivate slave reset when changing to the protected mode 8828

When changing from the projection mode to the protected mode, all slaves are normally briefly reset (reset or offline phase). This may lead to problems when the system is running. In such cases the "deactivation of the slave reset" prevents the short deactivation of the slave outputs during changing of the operating mode. >


Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 UID

2 command number

3 reserved OLP



Legend:

OLP offline phase = slave reset

1 byte 0x00 = offline phase when changing over to the protected mode 0x01 = no offline phase when changing over to the protected mode


>


Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 reflected user ID




>



294



>

Command 33 (0x0021) - Read diagnosis string of an AS-i slave (S-7.4) 8829

>


Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 UID

2 command number




Legende:




295



>


Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 reflected user ID




5 Number of bytes received reserved ST reflected slave address

6...m Diagnosis byte n+1 Diagnosis byte n



Legend:


>


Error Code [hex]

Error Meaning

0x00 no error







296



>

Command 34 (0x0022) - Read parameter string of an AS-i slave (S-7.4) 8830

>


Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 UID

2 command number




Legende:




297



>


Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 reflected user ID





6 ... m Parameter byte n+1 Parameter byte n

(m+1) ... 120 The area is completely ignored.


Legend:


>


Error Code [hex]

Error Meaning

0x00 no error







298



>

Command 35 (0x0022) - Write parameter string of an AS-i slave (S-7.4) 8831

>


Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 UID

2 command number

3 Number of bytes to be transmitted reserved ST SLA

4...m parameter byte n+1 parameter byte n



Legend:




The number of the bytes to be sent must be divisible by 2 since the system always transmits only multiples of 2 bytes in the S7.4 protocol.

299



>


Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 reflected user ID





6 ... m Parameter byte n+1 Parameter byte n



Legend:


>


Error Code [hex]

Error Meaning

0x00 no error

0x01 NOK Slave does not answer or AS-i master switches to offline mode during command execution OR: Timeout of slaves, switching of operating states with As-i parameters was not processed by the slave. Calling a not supported operating state can also cause this error message.

0x0C 7.4 sequence failed. AS-i slave generated wrong 7.4 sequence



0x0F SSA AS-i slave has aborted the S-7.4 string



0x12 HSE the previous segmented S-7.4 transfer was not yet completed

0x13 IDL invalid S-7.4 data length

0x14 invalid S-7.4 command


300



>

Command 36 (0x0024) – CTT2 Standard 8832

CTT2 profiles = S-7.5.5, S-7.A.5 or S-B.A.5

>


Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 UID

2 command number


4 DL IX



Legend:

DL data length 1 byte number of bytes to be transferred

permitted values: 0x00…0xFF = 0…255 ( data sheet of the slave)

IX index 1 byte pointer to the page to be read





301



>


Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 reflected user ID




5 number of bytes received reserved ST reflected slave address

6 data byte 0 RC

7 ... m data byte n+1* data byte n

* ... If the number of bytes to be transmitted is odd, a zero byte (= 0x00) is transmitted in the data byte n+1.

Legend:


RC CTT2 Response Code 1 byte 0x50 = No CTT2 error on command execution : The following data bytes contain the requested data.

0x90 = CTT2 error on command execution: - Data byte 0 contains → Standard CTT2 error codes (→ page 273). - The data in the following data bytes is irrelevant.

>


Error code Error Description

0x00 No fault

0x0A NA Slave is not in the LAS

0x14 IC Invalid S-7.4 command

0x17 CMD_PRE Start requirements for S-7.4 command not met: - Wrong slave profile (is not S-7.4) or: - Slave is not in LAS or: - Master is not in the protected mode

0xE1 CTT2_ACYCL_RD_NOK Command execution error

0xE2 CTT2_ACYCL_CMD_NOK Invalid command

0xE3 CTT2_ACYCL_RESP_NOK Wrong response data or internal error

0xE4 CTT2_ACYCL_WR_LEN_NOK Wrong data length when writing

0xE5 CTT2_ACYCL_STATE_NOK Invalid state of the CTT2 state machine when executing the command

0xE6 CTT2_ACYCL_STATE_RESET Reset when executing the command

0xE7 CTT2_ACYCL_RD_LEN_NOK Wrong data length when reading

0xE8 CTT2_ACYCL_RD_WR_LEN_NOK Wrong data length when reading / writing

0xEF CTT2_ACYCL_CMD_TIMEOUT Timeout

302



>

Command 37 (0x0025) – CTT2 standard write 8848

>


Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 UID

2 command number


4 DL IX

5 ... m Data byte (n+1) Data byte n



Legend:








303



>


Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 reflected user ID



4 Command error code

5 reserved reserved ST Reflected slave address

6 data byte 0 RC

Legend:


RC CTT2 Response Code 1 byte 0x51 = No CTT2 error on command execution : The data in the following data bytes is irrelevant.

0x91 = CTT2 error on command execution: Data byte 0 contains → Standard CTT2 error codes (→ page 273).

>



0x00 No fault













304



>

Command 38 (0x0026) – CTT2 Vendor Specific Read 8849


>


Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 UID

2 command number


4 DL IX



Legend:








305



>


Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 reflected user ID





6 data byte 0 RC



Legend:



0x92 = CTT2 error on command execution: The following data bytes 0...5 contain → CTT2 error object (→ page 273).

>



0x00 No fault













306



>

Command 39 (0x0027) – CTT2 Vendor Specific Write 8850


>


Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 UID

2 command number


4 DL IX




Legend:








307




Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 reflected user ID




5 reserved reserved ST reflected slave address

6 Data byte 0 RC

7 ... m Data byte n+1 Data byte n

Legend:




>



0x00 No fault













308



>

Command 64 (0x0040) – CTT2 device group read 8851


>


Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 UID

2 command number


4 DL IX



Legend:








309



>


Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 reflected user ID





6 data byte 0 RC



Legend:




>



0x00 No fault













310



>

Command 65 (0x0041) – CTT2 Device Group Write 8852


>


Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 UID

2 command number


4 DL IX




Legend:








311



>


Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 reflected user ID




5 reserved reserved ST reflected slave address

6 data byte 0 RC

7 ... m data byte n+1 data byte n

Legend:




>



0x00 No fault













312



>

Command 66 (0x0042) – CTT2 Vendor Specific Selective Read From Buffer 8853


>


Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 UID

2 command number


4 SIX IX

5 ... m reserved DL



Legend:





SIX sub-index 1 byte pointer on element on this page ( data sheet of the slave)




313



>


Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 reflected user ID





6 data byte 0 RC


Legend:




>



0x00 No fault













314



>

Command 67 (0x0043) – CTT2 Vendor Specific Selective Write From Buffer 8855


>


Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 UID

2 command number


4 SIX IX

5 Data byte 0 DL




Legende:









315



>


Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 reflected user ID





6 data byte 0 RC


Legend:


RC CTT2 Response Code 1 byte 0x59 = No CTT2 error on command execution : Data byte 0 contains the number of bytes to be read (block length); Valid values: 0x00 ... 0xFF (→ data sheet of the AS-i slave)


>



0x00 No fault













316



>

Command 68 (0x0044) – CTT2 Vendor Specific Selective Read 8857


>


Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 UID

2 command number


4 SIX IX

5 ... m reserved DL



Legend:









317



>


Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 reflected user ID





6 data byte 0 RC


Legend:




>



0x00 No fault













318



>

Command 69 (0x0045) – CTT2 Vendor Specific Selective Write 8858


>


Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 UID

2 command number


4 SIX IX

5 Data byte 0 DL




Legende:









319



>


Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 reflected user ID





6 data byte 0 RC


Legend:


RC CTT2 Response Code 1 byte 0x59 = No CTT2 error on command execution : Data byte 0 contains the number of bytes to be read (block length); Valid values: 0x00 ... 0xFF (→ data sheet of the AS-i slave)


>



0x00 No fault













320



>

Command 70 (0x0046) – CTT2 device group selective Rread 8857


>


Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 UID

2 command number


4 SIX IX

5 ... m reserved DL



Legend:









321



>


Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 reflected user ID





6 data byte 0 RC


Legend:


RC CTT2 Response Code 1 byte 0x5A = No CTT2 error on command execution : The following data bytes contain the requested data.

0x9A = CTT2 error on command execution: The following data bytes 0...5 contain → CTT2 error object (→ page 273).

>



0x00 No fault













322



>

Command 71 (0x0047) – CTT2 Device Group Selective Write 8860


>


Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 UID

2 command number


4 SIX IX

5 Data byte 0 DL




Legende:









323



>


Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 reflected user ID





6 data byte 0 RC


Legend:


RC CTT2 Response Code 1 byte 0x5B = No CTT2 error on command execution : Data byte 0 contains the block length (= number of bytes to be read); Valid values: 0x00 ... 0xFF (→ data sheet of the AS-i slave)

0x9B = CTT2 error on command execution: The following data bytes 0...5 contain → CTT2 error object (→ page 273).

>



0x00 No fault













324



>

Command 73 (0x0049) – CTT2 Vendor Specific Exchange 8863


>


Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 UID

2 command number


4 RL IX

5 Data byte 0 WL




Legende:



RL read length 1 byte number of bytes to be read





WL write length 1 byte number of bytes to be written


325



>


Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 reflected user ID





6 data byte 0 RC



Legend:


RC CTT2 Response Code 1 byte 0x5D = No CTT2 error on command execution The following data bytes contain the requested data.

0x9D = CTT2 error on command execution The following data bytes 0...5 contain → CTT2 error object (→ page 273).

>



0x00 No fault













326



>

Command 74 (0x004A) – CTT2 Device Group Exchange 8866


>


Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 UID

2 command number


4 RL IX

5 Data byte 0 WL




Legende:



RL read length 1 byte number of bytes to be read





WL write length 1 byte number of bytes to be written


327



>


Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 reflected user ID





6 data byte 0 RC



Legend:


RC CTT2 Response Code 1 byte 0x5E = No CTT2 error on command execution : The following data bytes contain the requested data.

0x9E = CTT2 error on command execution: The following data bytes 0...5 contain → CTT2 error object (→ page 273).

>



0x00 No fault













328



>

Command 75 (0x004B) – CTT2 Device Group Selective Read From Buffer 8861


>


Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 UID

2 command number


4 SIX IX

5 ... m reserved DL



Legend:









329



>


Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 reflected user ID





6 data byte 0 RC


Legend:


RC CTT2 Response Code 1 byte 0x5A = No CTT2 error on command execution : The following data bytes contain the requested data.

0x9A = CTT2 error on command execution: The following data bytes 0...5 contain → CTT2 error object (→ page 273).

>



0x00 No fault













330



>

Command 76 (0x004C) – CTT2 Device Group Selective Write From Buffer 8862


>


Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 UID

2 command number


4 SIX IX

5 Data byte 0 DL




Legende:









331



>


Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 reflected user ID





6 data byte 0 RC


Legend:


RC CTT2 Response Code 1 byte 0x5B = No CTT2 error on command execution : Data byte 0 contains the block length (= number of bytes to be read); Valid values: 0x00 ... 0xFF (→ data sheet of the AS-i slave)

0x9B = CTT2 error on command execution: The following data bytes 0...5 contain → CTT2 error object (→ page 273).

>



0x00 No fault













332



>

Command 80 (0x0050) – Adjust AS-i master settings 16772

>


Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 UID

2 command number

3 Setting reserved MOD



Legend:

Setting Selection of the diagnostic function

0x01 = ground-fault detection (EE) 0x02 = double address recognition (DAE)

MOD Activate/deactivate the selected diagnostic function in the settings

0 = deactivate function 1 = activate function

>


Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 reflected user ID




>


Error Code [hex]

Error Meaning

0x00 no error

0x01 IP Wrong parameter assigned. Setting was not adopted.

333



>

Command 81 (0x0051) – Reset error counter 16773

Command sets the following counters to 0:

Telegram errors

All slave telegram errors

Configuration errors

Voltage drops < 22.5 V

Voltage drops < 19.0 V

Earth faults

Error distribution telegram errors >


Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 UID

2 command number



>


Offset Word no.

bit

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 reflected user ID




>



334



>

Programmers' notes: call up acyclic services 11208

EtherNet/IP controllers use the Message (MSG) command to send data/commands asynchronously to

another network participant and receive its response.

For detailed information about the Message (MSG) command: → operating instructions of

the EtherNet/IP controller used!

335



>

8.7.6 Configuration mode 12945

To properly set the AC142n for permanent operation in the EtherNet/IP network, type and scope of the data to be transmitted as well as the parameters of the EtherNet/IP interface need to be defined. The following configuration modes are available:

Configuration mode: Top-down (→ page 336)

Configuration mode: Independent (→ page 341)

336



>

Configuration mode: Top-down 12948

In configuration mode 'Top-down', the device-specific parameters and the paramaters of the fieldbus slots are set in the projecting software of the EtherNet/IP controller. The created configuration is then transferred to AC142n (download).

Example: Configure AC142n in top-down mode and integrate in a RSLogix-5000 project >

1 Preparations

► Connect AC142n to the → I/O scanner

► Configure the IP settings of the configuration interface (X3) in line with the network requirements (→ Notes on IP settings (→ page 89)).

► Enabled the top-down configuration mode (→ Set the configuration mode (→ page 98)).

► Download and unpack the ESD file (→ Download the device and I/O description (→ page 95)).

► Import the downloaded EDS file in RSLogix 5000 (→ operating instructions RSLogix 5000). >

2 Open/Create a EtherNet/IP project

► Start RSLogix 5000.

► Open an existing EtherNet/IP project. OR Create a new EtherNet/IP project with the EtherNet/IP controller and I/O scanner.

>

3 Add AC142n to the project

► In the project structure: Right-click on [I/O Configuration] > [Name_des_I/O-Scanners] > [Ethernet]

> The context menu appears.

► Create a new device with [New Module].

> The dialogue box [Select Module Type] appears.


Option 1: configure the device using the EDS file

► In the [Catalog] tab, select AC1421 or AC1422 and confirm with [Create].

> The [New Module] window appears.

► Set the following parameters:


Name short description of device

name appears in the tree structure of the RSLogix-5000 project

e.g. _AC1421

Description detailed description of device (optional)

max. 128 characters

e.g. I/O adapter

IP address IP address of the device's EtherNet/IP interface e.g. 192.168.10.10

► In the group [Module Definition], press [Change ...].

337



> The [Module Definition] window appears.

► Set the parameters as shown:

► Press [OK] to confirm the input and to close the window.

> AC142n appears in the tree structure of the project.


338



Option 2: configure the device without EDS file

► Select [Catalog]: I/O adapter ETHERNET MODULE (Generic Ethernet Module) and confirm with [Create].





>

4 Set the fieldbus parameters and the module configuration

► In the tree structure: double-click on [Controller ETIP_Controller] > [Controller Tags]

> The detailed view of the controller tags appears.

339



► Click on [_AC142n:C]

> The detailed view shows a table with the current values of the configuration assembly instance (device-specific parameters, module configuration)

► For each row (= parameter): enter the desired parameter value in the [Value] column (→ Parameter setting via the configuration assembly object (→ page 163))

► Save the project. >

5 Transfer the set configuration to the controller (download)

► Set the communication path to the device (→ operating instructions RSLogix 5000).

► Transfer the project to the EtherNet/IP controller and start it.

> AC142n: the start screen shows the status of the EtherNet/IP connection:

EtherNet/IP active >

6 Optional: import the description of the inputs and outputs into the project

► Download the I/O description file (→ Download the device and I/O description (→ page 95)).

► In RSLogix 5000: Select [Tools] > [Import] > [Tag and Logic Comments ...] to start the wizard for importing the I/O description.

> The [Import] dialogue box appears.

340



► Select the downloaded file (*.csv) and click [Import] to load it.

► In the tree structure: double-click on [Controller Tags]


> [_AC142n:I] and [_AC142n:O] show descriptions of the inputs and outputs.

341



>

Configuration mode: Independent 12949

In configuration mode 'Independent', the device-specific parameters are set via the local display on the AC142n (→ Set the configuration mode (→ page 98), → Set the EtherNet/IP module configuration (→ page 101)). The assembly configuration defined in the projecting software is not evaluated.

Example: Configure AC142n in Independent mode and integrate in a RSLogix 5000 project

>

1 Preparations

► Connect AC142n to the → I/O scanner.

► Configure the IP settings of the configuration interface (X3) in line with the network requirements (→ Notes on IP settings (→ page 89)).

► Enable the "independent" configuration mode (→ Set the configuration mode (→ page 98)).

► Download and unpack the ESD file (→ Download the device and I/O description (→ page 95)).

► Import the downloaded EDS file in RSLogix 5000 (→ operating instructions RSLogix 5000). >

2 Set the device-specific parameters and the module configuration

► Set the fieldbus parameters → Set the device-specific parameters (→ page 99)

► Set the module configuration → Set the EtherNet/IP module configuration (→ page 101)

>

3 Open/Create a EtherNet/IP project

► Start RSLogix 5000.

► Open an existing EtherNet/IP project. OR Create a new EtherNet/IP project with the EtherNet/IP controller and I/O scanner.

>

4 Add AC142n to the project

► In the project structure: Right-click on [I/O Configuration] > [Name_des_I/O-Scanners] > [Ethernet]

> The context menu appears.

► Create a new device with [New Module].

> The dialogue box [Select Module Type] appears.


Option 1: configure the device using the EDS file

► In the [Catalog] tab, select AC1421 or AC1422 and confirm with [Create].


► Set the following parameters:


Name short description of device

name appears in the tree structure of the RSLogix-5000 project

e.g. _AC1421

Description detailed description of device (optional)

max. 128 characters

e.g. I/O adapter

IP address IP address of the device's EtherNet/IP interface e.g. 192.168.10.10

► In the group [Module Definition], press [Change ...].

342



> The [Module Definition] window appears.





343



Option 2: configure the device without EDS file

► Select [Catalog]: I/O adapter ETHERNET MODULE (Generic Ethernet Module) and confirm with [Create].



In the "independent" configuration mode, the value entered for [Assembly Instance] has no relevance since the parameters are set directly on the device (→ Set the device-specific parameters and the module configuration (→ page 341)).

Irrespective of the value entered for [Size], RSLogix 5000 creates a data field in the controller tags with a length of 251 bytes.


► AC142n appears in the tree structure of the project:

>

5 Transfer the set configuration to the controller (download)

► Set the communication path to the device (→ operating instructions RSLogix 5000).

► Transfer the project to the EtherNet/IP controller and start it.

> AC142n: the start screen shows the status of the EtherNet/IP connection:

EtherNet/IP active >

344



6 Optional: import the description of the inputs and outputs into the project

► Download the I/O description file (→ Download the device and I/O description (→ page 95)).

► In RSLogix 5000: Select [Tools] > [Import] > [Tag and Logic Comments ...] to start the wizard for importing the I/O description.

> The [Import] dialogue box appears.

► Select the downloaded file (*.csv) and click [Import] to load it.

► In the tree structure: double-click on [Controller Tags]


> [_AC142n:I] and [_AC142n:O] show descriptions of the inputs and outputs.

345


Appendix OSC messages

>

8.8 OSC messages

OSC messages: System ......................................................................................................................346 OSC messages: AS-i 1 / AS-i 2 ............................................................................................................347

18959

This section contains information about the messages for events, warnings and faults of the AC142n.

346



>

8.8.1 OSC messages: System 14284

Message Type Corrective measures

An internal device error was detected <Fehlernummer>

Error ► Note the message and contact the ifm service center

Permitted temperature limit value inside the device was exceeded (<xxx.x> °C)

Warning ► Check thermal conditions of the system environment

First operation after delivery Event not necessary

The output control was set to <Gateway,manuell,SPS>

Event not necessary

System power-up completed, <SW-Version> Event not necessary

A system reset was requested manually Event not necessary

The user-specific message history was deleted. Event not necessary

The device was reset to factory settings via <HMI, Feldbus>.

Event not necessary

PLC used for more than 10 hours. Event not necessary

The project <Name> was loaded. Event not necessary

The PLC was set to the operating mode <Projektierungsmodus, geschützter Betrieb>.

Event not necessary

The firmware was updated from <FW-Version> to version <FW-Version>.

Event not necessary

The settings of the fieldbus interface were modified

Event not necessary

The fieldbus connection was established Event not necessary

The fieldbus connection was aborted Event not necessary

The IP settings of the configuration interface were changed

Event not necessary

347



>

8.8.2 OSC messages: AS-i 1 / AS-i 2 16029

Message Type Corrective measures

System errors: AS-i master <1,2> Error ► Reboot the device

If the error occurs again:

► Note the message and contact the ifm service center!

Earth fault: AS-i <1,2> Error ► Check for earth fault of AC142n

Incorrect profile: AS-i <1,2>, slave <1(A)..31(A), 1B..31B> with profile <S-x.x.x> expected, but <S-y.y.y> found.

Error ► Check profile of the AS-i slave

Config error: AS-i <1,2>, slave <1(A)..31(A), 1B..31B> with the profile <S-x.x.x> missing

Error ► Check connections of the AS-i slave

► Reconnect AS-i slave

Config error: AS-i <1,2>, slave <1(A)..31(A), 1B..31B> with the profile <S-x.x.x> is available but not projected

Error ► Carry out projection process ([Quick setup] > [Project all])

Protocol error: AS-i <1, 2>, slave <1(A)..31(A), 1B..31B> no data transmission

Error ► Improve the transmission quality on the AS-i line

Double address detected: AS-i <1, 2>, slave <1(A)..31(A), 1B..31B>

Error ► Remove an AS-i slave with a double address from the AS-i network

► Readdress the remaining AS-i slave

► Reconnect removed AS-i slave to the AS-i network

The automatic addressing is not activated for AS-i <1,2>.

Warning ► Activate automatic addressing ([AS-i1]/[AS-i2] > [Master setup])

A voltage drop of 19.0 V was detected on AS-i master <1,2>

Warning ► Check voltage supply of the device and replace if necessary

A voltage drop of 22.5 V was detected on AS-i master <1,2>

Warning ► Check voltage supply of the device and replace if necessary

Increased message error rate: AS-i <1, 2>, slave <1(A)..31(A), 1B..31B>

Warning ► Improve the transmission quality on the AS-i line

Peripheral fault: AS-i <1, 2>, slave <1(A)..31(A), 1B..31B>

Warning ► Check displayed AS-i slave

AS-i slave with address 0 cannot be automatically readdressed (wrong profile)

Warning ► Activate automatic addressing ([AS-i1]/[AS-i2] > [Master setup]

Manual output change: AS-i <1, 2>, slave <1(A)..31(A), 1B..31B>, value: <0..F, 0..32768>

Event not necessary

Manual parameter change: AS-i <1, 2>, slave <1(A)..31(A), 1B..31B>, value: <0..F, 0..32768>

Event not necessary

AS-i master <1,2> was switched to the <geschützten Betrieb,Projektierungsmodus>

Event not necessary

AS-i projection process was carried out. Event not necessary

AS-i slave with the address 0 was detected Event not necessary

348


Appendix Information on AS-i

>

8.9 Information on AS-i 6278

Here you will find further information for a better understanding of AS-Interface.

E-learning program in the ifm download area: → www.ifm.com > Select your country > [Service] > [Download] > [Industrial communication] > [AS-i Animations] > E-learning

Literature: www.as-interface.net > [THE SYSTEM] > [Publications]

http://www.ifm.com/


349


Glossary of Terms

9 Glossary of Terms

A

A/B slave

AS-i slave with an A or B being appended to its address number and which may therefore be present twice on the →master.

>

Acyclic data transmission

In general data from the → master are transmitted once per → cycle to one each of the → slaves (= → cyclic data transmission). Data transmission only at certain events (e.g. when the device is switched on or when values have been changed) is called acyclic data transmission.

>

Address

This is the "name" of the bus participant. All participants need a unique address so that the signals can be exchanged without problem.

>

Application software

Software specific to the application, implemented by the machine manufacturer, generally containing logic sequences, limits and expressions that control the appropriate inputs, outputs, calculations and decisions.

>

Architecture

Specific configuration of hardware and/or software elements in a system.

>

AS-i

The AS-Interface (AS-i = Actuator Sensor Interface) is a standard for fieldbus communication to EN 50295 and IEC 62026-2. It was developed for the connection of actuators and sensors with a simple wiring to replace the conventional parallel wiring.

An unscreened two-wire yellow flat cable (max. 500 m) serves for data transmission as well as for voltage supply (24...30 V DC) for the communication electronics and for participants with a low current requirement. Loads with a greater energy requirement additionally receive a separate (black) flat cable for energy supply with 24 V DC.

AS-Interface is a single master system. Up to 62 slaves can be connected per

master. Each of these slaves needs an unambiguous address. The master cyclically polls (→Polling)) all projected slaves and exchanges the up to 248 input data and 186 output data with them.

→ www.as-interface.net AS-International Association (user association)

>

AS-i cycle

An AS-i cycle contains the data exchange of up to 31 slaves plus a telegram inclusion phase plus, if required, a telegram management phase (→ AS-i phases (status machine) (→ page 349)). In the case of the extended addressing mode, two AS-i cycles are required for data transfer to all A/B slaves.

>

AS-i phases (status machine)

Offline phase: No AS-i data traffic takes place during initialisation.

Detection phase: In the detection phase, the AS-i master first of all searches for existing slaves - irrespective of whether they are projected or not.

Activation phase: In this phase, the found slaves are activated depending on the operating mode.

Data exchange phase: The AS-i master carries out cyclical data exchange with the activated slaves.

Management phase: At the end of a cycle the AS-i master goes into the management phase, during which the master can send a command to a specific slave (if requested).


350


Glossary of Terms

Inclusion phase: After this, the AS-i master goes into the inclusion phase, during which it sends a command to a free slave address to detect new slaves.

>

ASIsafe

The name for 'Safety at Work' used by Siemens.

>

Assembly Instance

Assembly Instances are parameters of a logical connection (→Connection). The describe which data at which length are to be transmitted between the communication nodes.

The following Assembly Instances exist:

Input

Output

Configuration

In a logical connection each of these Assembly Instances can only be used once . The Assembly Instance type Configuration must

only be used once in an Assembly Instance for one and the same communication node. >

B

Baud

Baud, abbrev.: Bd = unit for the data transmission speed. Do not confuse baud with "bits per second" (bps, bits/s). Baud indicates the number of changes of state (steps, cycles) per second over a transmission length. But it is not defined how many bits per step are transmitted. The name baud can be traced back to the French inventor J. M. Baudot whose code was used for telex machines. 1 MBd = 1024 x 1024 Bd = 1 048 576 Bd

>

Burst errors

Burst errors are →faults occurring depending on others. The class indicates the maximum permissible number of burst errors: Class 1 = high protection, Class 2 = lower protection etc.

>

Bus

Serial data transmission of several participants on the same cable.

>

C

CCDI

CCDI = CTT Configuration Data Image = current CTT configuration Configuration of 7.4 and 7.5 slaves currently determined by the AS-i master: - Manufacturer ID, - Vendor ID, - Device ID, - Device Group ID.

>

CDI

CDI = Configuration Data Image = current AS-i configuration The configuration of the connected AS-i slaves determined by the AS-i master: LDS and AS-i profiles (IO, ID, ID1, ID2)

>

CIP

CIP = Common Industrial Protocol Object-oriented description of a communication protocol for industrial requirements. Presently used for the fieldbus systems DeviceNet, ControlNet and EtherNet/IP. >

CODESYS

CODESYS® is a registered trademark of 3S – Smart Software Solutions GmbH, Germany. 'CODESYS for Automation Alliance' associates companies of the automation industry whose hardware devices are all programmed with the widely used IEC 61131-3 development tool CODESYS®. Homepage → www.codesys.com

>

Connection

Describes the logical connection between 2 application objects. >

ControllerE

Master in the AS-i bus system of the generation E.

>

CTT

e.g. CTT2 = Combined Transaction Type 2 → Combined transaction – Use of analogue channels in the gateway depending on the slave profile (→ page 153)

>

http://www.codesys.com/

351


Glossary of Terms

Cycle time

This is the time for one cycle. The following happens:

PLC cycle: The PLC program performs one complete run.

AS-i cycle: all AS-i slaves are updated (5...10 ms). The cycle time mainly depends on the AS-i slaves involved in the data exchange. Message errors and management phase

may extend the cycle time ( no constant cycle time).

>

Cyclic data transmission

Data are transmitted to one slave at a time by the master once per cycle.

>

Cyclical polling

AS-i master cyclically polls the data of all →slaves in the →bus (see above). The data is updated in the →master after max. 5 ms. If →A/B slaves are used, the →cycle time can be extended to 10 ms.

>

D

Data image (AS-i)

See →process image; sum of all digital and analogue input and output data. As regards the time, the data image represents the current condition of each individual slave and NOT a consistent image of the entire AS-i network at an exact point in time.

>

Data type

Depending on the data type, values of different sizes can be stored.

Data type

min. value max. value size in the memory

BOOL FALSE TRUE 1 byte

BYTE 0 255 1 byte

WORD 0 65 535 2 bytes

DWORD 0 4 294 967 295 4 bytes

SINT -128 127 1 byte

USINT 0 255 1 byte

INT -32 768 32 767 2 bytes

UINT 0 65 535 2 bytes

DINT -2 147 483 648 2 147 483 647 4 bytes

UDINT 0 4 294 967 295 4 bytes

REAL -3.402823466

• 1038 3.402823466 • 1038 4 bytes

ULINT 0 18 446 744 073 709 551 615 8 Bytes

STRING number of char. + 1

>

DeviceNet

Fieldbus system for larger data volumes based on →CAN technology, requires special cables, complex connection technology. Can be used e.g. as a supplier for AS-i over longer distances. Corresponding →gateways are available.

>

DHCP

DHCP = Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol = protocol for the dynamic configuration by

the→host. DHCP is a protocol that provides dynamic configuration of IP addresses and associated information. The protocol supports use of IP addresses which are only available in limited number by a centralised management of the address assignment. The participant logs on to a server with this service when it is switched on in a network for the first time. The server assigns a local free →IP address to the participant.

>

Diagnosis

During the diagnosis, the "state of health" of the device is checked. It is to be found out if and what →faults are given in the device.

352


Glossary of Terms

Depending on the device, the inputs and outputs can also be monitored for their correct function. - wire break, - short circuit, - value outside range.

For diagnosis, configuration and log data can be used, created during the "normal" operation of the device. The correct start of the system components is monitored during the initialisation and start phase. Errors are recorded in the log file. For further diagnosis, self-tests can also be carried out.

>

DRAM

DRAM = Dynamic Random Access Memory. Technology for an electronic memory module with random access (Random Access Memory, RAM). The memory element is a capacitor which is either charged or discharged. It becomes accessible via a switching transistor and is either read or overwritten with new contents. The memory contents are volatile: the stored information is lost in case of lacking operating voltage or too late restart.

>

E

EDS

EDS = Electronic Data Sheet An EDS is a device description fiile in ASCII format, comparable to the GSD or the GSDML file of Profibus or Profinet. >

EMC

EMC = Electro Magnetic Compatibility. According to the EC directive (2004/108/EEC) concerning electromagnetic compatibility (in short EMC directive) requirements are made for electrical and electronic apparatus, equipment, systems or components to operate satisfactorily in the existing electromagnetic environment. The devices must not interfere with their environment and must not be adversely influenced by external electromagnetic interference.

>

Ethernet

Ethernet is a widely used, manufacturer-independent technology which enables data transmission in the network at a speed of 10...10 000 million bits per second

(Mbps). Ethernet belongs to the family of so-called "optimum data transmission" on a non exclusive transmission medium. The concept was developed in 1972 and specified as IEEE 802.3 in 1985.

>

Explicit Messaging

Acyclic data exchange between → I/O scanner and → I/O adapter based on the TCP/IP communication protocol. >

F

FC

FC = flat cable. The yellow or black AS-i cable is meant.

>

FE – functional earth

Functional earth is a reference potential which is not connected to protective earth or only connected when special measures are taken. The functional earth serves as equalisation of potential for an ungrounded installation (e.g. →SELV).

>

Fieldbus

A →bus for industrial applications: mechanically extremely robust and excellent data protection.

>

Firmware

System software, basic program in the device, virtually the →runtime system. The firmware establishes the connection between the hardware of the device and the application program. The firmware is provided by the manufacturer of the controller as a part of the system and cannot be changed by the user.

>

Flash memory

Flash ROM (or flash EPROM or flash memory) combines the advantages of semiconductor memory and hard disks. Similar to a hard disk, the data are however written and deleted blockwise in data blocks up to 64, 128, 256, 1024, ... bytes at the same time.

Advantages of flash memories

The stored data are maintained even if there is no supply voltage.

353


Glossary of Terms

Due to the absence of moving parts, flashis noiseless and insensitive to shocks andmagnetic fields.

Disadvantages of flash memories

A storage cell can tolerate a limitednumber of write and delete processes:• Multi-level cells: typ. 10 000 cycles• Single level cells: typ. 100 000 cycles

Given that a write process writes memoryblocks of between 16 and 128 Kbytes atthe same time, memory cells which requireno change are used as well.

>

FMEA

FMEA = Failure Mode and Effects Analysis. Method of reliability engineering, to find potential weak points. Within the framework of quality or security management, the FMEA is used preventively to prevent faults and increase the technical reliability. >

FRAM

FRAM, or also FeRAM, means Ferroelectric Random Access Memory. The storage operation and erasing operation is carried out by a polarisation change in a ferroelectric layer. Advantages of FRAM as compared to conventional read-only memories: • non-volatile,• compatible with common EEPROMs, but:• access time approx. 100 ns,• nearly unlimited access cycles possible.

>

G

Gateway

Gateway = access, coupler. Gateways enable connection of completely different systems. Gateways are used when two incompatible network types are to be connected by converting the protocol of one system to the protocol of the other system. Example: connection between AS-i and higher-level fieldbus systems such as

Ethernet DP, DeviceNet, Interbus-S orother interfaces, e.g. RS-485. The deviceincludes an AS-i master which is directly

coupled to the host interface (e.g. EthernetDP slave).>

Gateway transfer time

The time that is needed for the input data in the DP-RAM of the AS-i master to be copied into the output data of the netX, and vice versa. The distance from DP-RAM to DP-RAM is decisive. >

>

GSD

Generic Station Description Describes the interface to the device to be connected to the fieldbus.

You can find the current version of the GSD file on the ifm homepage:

→ www.ifm.com > Select your country >[Service] > [Download] > [Industrialcommunication]e.g. for AC1375:

GSD file for SmartLink AC1375

download the file ifm...07E5.gsd (... =

version)>

GSDML

GSDML = Generic Station Description Markup Language. Description language which can describe the characteristics of a device family across several levels. In this XML scheme, as much

as possible of the semantics of the GSD was adopted. >

H

HMI

HMI = Human Machine Interface >

Host

The controller in the hierarchy above the AS-i master, e.g. a PLC or a processor. >

http://www.ifm.com/

354


Glossary of Terms

I

I&M

I&M = Identification & Maintenance

chapter I&M data

Profibus Profile Guidelines Part 1: Identification & Maintenance Functions

>

I/O adapter

Decentralised device in an EtherNet/IP network (e.g. AC1421/AC1422) >

I/O scanner

Coupling element for the connection of decentralised devices to an EtherNet/IP controller. >

ID

ID = Identifier

Name to differentiate the devices / participants connected to a system or the message packets transmitted between the participants.

>

IEC 61131

Standard: Basics of programmable logic controllers • Part 1: General information • Part 2: Production equipment requirements and tests • Part 3: Programming languages • Part 5: Communication • Part 7: Fuzzy Control Programming

>

Implicit Messaging

Cyclic data exchange between → I/O scanner and → I/O adapter based on the UDP/IP communication protocol. Works based on the Producer-Consumer model, i.e. both communication nodes know the structure of the data to be exchanged before data transmission starts. >

Instructions

Superordinate word for one of the following terms: installation instructions, data sheet, user information, operating instructions, device manual, installation information, online help, system manual, programming manual, etc.

>

Intended use

Use of a product in accordance with the information provided in the instructions for use.

>

IO-Link

Point-to-point connection between 2 devices. The following transmission is possible: - binary signals or - greater data fields for parameter setting.

→ www.io-link.com

>

IP address

IP = Internet Protocol. The IP address is a number which is necessary to clearly identify an internet participant. For the sake of clarity the number is written in 4 decimal values, e.g. 127.215.205.156.

>

J

Jitter

Jitter means a slight fluctuation in accuracy in the transmission cycle when transmitting digital signals. More generally, jitter in transmission technology means an abrupt and undesired change of the signal characteristics.

>

L

LAS

List of Active →Slaves. In this slave list the AS-i master enters the slaves detected as active for this →master.

>

LDS

List of Detected →Slaves. In this slave list the AS-i master enters the slaves detected as present for this →master.

>

LED

LED = Light Emitting Diode. Light emitting diode, also called luminescent diode, an electronic element of high coloured luminosity at small volume with negligible power loss.

>

LFS

List of Failed Slaves = list of →slaves with configuration errors.

http://www.io-link.com/

355


Glossary of Terms

In this slave list the AS-i master enters the slaves with a projection error on this →master.

>

Link

A link is a cross-reference to another part in the document or to an external document.

>

LKCS

LKCS = List of Known CTT Slaves

In this list the CTT slaves (profile 7.4 and 7.5) which are indicated in the LDS and whose CTT configuration has already been read are entered. This list is independent of the LDS, LPS, LAS and LNACS.

>

LNACS

LNACS = List of Not Activated CTT Slaves

In this list, the CTT slaves (profiles 7.4 and 7.5) which have been detected as CTT slaves but not activated are entered. As soon as the slave is entered in the LAS, it is deleted from this list. These slaves only take part in the data exchange until the CTT configuration has been read.

>

LPS

List of Projected →Slaves. In this slave list the AS-i master enters the slaves projected for this →master.

>

LSB

Least Significant Bit/Byte

>

M

MAC-ID

MAC = Manufacturer‘s Address Code = manufacturer's serial number. →ID = Identifier Every network card has a MAC address, a clearly defined worldwide unique numerical code, more or less a kind of serial number. Such a MAC address is a sequence of 6 hexadecimal numbers, e.g. "00-0C-6E-D0-02-3F".

>

Master

Handles the complete organisation on the bus. The master decides on the bus access time and polls the →slaves cyclically.

>

Master-slave communication

AS-i strictly operates to the master-slave principle. The master polls all slaves one after the other in always the same order. Only one master per network line is allowed (→cyclical polling).

>

MBd

MegaBaud Baud, abbrev.: Bd = unit for the data transmission speed. Do not confuse baud with "bits per second" (bps, bits/s). Baud indicates the number of changes of state (steps, cycles) per second over a transmission length. But it is not defined how many bits per step are transmitted. The name baud can be traced back to the French inventor J. M. Baudot whose code was used for telex machines. 1 MBd = 1024 x 1024 Bd = 1 048 576 Bd

>

MMI

→ HMI (→ page 353)

>

Modbus

The Modbus protocol is a communication protocol based on a →master/slave architecture and was generated by Modicon (since 1994: Groupe Schneider) in 1979 for communication with its PLCs. In the industry, Modbus has become a de facto standard. Modbus/TCP is based on →Ethernet TCP/IP. Modbus/TCP ports the protocol defined for the serial interface to TCP. The →IP address clearly identifies each device in a network. Therefore the slave address was used to identify one of several logical units (unit IDs) in a physical device. To do so, the extended IP addressing is used. Example: 192.168.83.28.1 means unit ID 1 on IP address 192.168.83.28.

>

MRAM

MRAM = Magnetoresistive Random Access Memory The information is stored by means of magnetic storage elements. The property of certain materials is used to change their electrical resistance when exposed to magnetic fields. Advantages of MRAM as compared to conventional RAM memories: • non volatile (like FRAM), but:

356


Glossary of Terms

• access time only approx. 35 ns, • unlimited number of access cycles possible.

>

MSB

Most Significant Bit/Byte

>

O

OSC

OSC = Online Support Center → Online Support Center (OSC) (→ page 123) Help system in the device

>

OSSD

OSSD = Output Signal Switching Device = output signal of a safety switching device, e.g. SafetySwitch, AS-i safety monitor.

>

P

Password

AS-i controllerE: in the menu [System Setup], menu item [Password] the handling can be restricted or enabled. When delivered, the device is in the user mode. By entering an invalid password (e.g. 1000) all menu items which can change settings are blocked.

>

PCCD

PCCD = Projected CTT Configuration Data. Configuration data for the 7.4 and 7.5 slaves stored in the device: • manufacturer ID, • vendor ID, • device ID, • device group ID.

>

PCD

PCD = Projected Configuration Data Configuration data stored in the device: → LPS and AS-i profile (IO, ID, ID1, ID2)

>

PDM

PDM = Process and Dialogue Module. Device for communication of the operator with the machine / plant.

>

PELV

PELV = Protective Extra Low Voltage Functional extra low voltage with safe separation, grounded variant of →SELV. The

specification as PELV system to IEC 364-4-41 covers a measure to protect against direct and indirect contact with dangerous voltages by a "safe separation" between primary and secondary side in the device (e.g. power supply to PELV specification). For this reason no separate PE conductor is required in a PELV system. It is allowed to ground circuits and / or bodies in a PELV system.

>

Pictogram

Pictograms are figurative symbols which convey information by a simplified graphic representation. (→ chapter What do the symbols and formats mean?)

>

PLC configuration

Part of the CODESYS user interface.

► The programmer tells the programming system which hardware is to be programmed.

> CODESYS loads the corresponding libraries.

> Reading and writing the periphery states (inputs/outputs) is possible.

>

Polling

to poll = to count votes The controller master fetches the data from every participant in the system successively:

1. Master calls participant 1.

2. Participant 1 replies with its current data (actual values).

3. Master transfers more data (target values) to participant 1, if needed.

4. Participant 1 acknowledges reception of the data.

etc. the same procedure for each further participant. AS-i, →cyclical polling: AS-i master cyclically polls the data of all →slaves in the →bus (see above). The data is updated in the →master after max. 5 ms. If →A/B slaves are used, the →cycle time can be extended to 10 ms.

>

Power-on delay time

The time required by the controller K6 from the application of the voltage supply until all of the following targets are reached:

both AS-i networks have reached normal operation

357


Glossary of Terms

the master has read the configuration data of the CTTx slaves

the field buses can use the gateway (optional)

the PLC program was started (optional).

>

Process image

Process image is the status of the inputs and outputs the PLC operates with within one →cycle.

At the beginning of the cycle the PLC reads the conditions of all inputs into the process image. During the cycle the PLC cannot detect changes to the inputs.

During the cycle the outputs are only changed virtually (in the process image).

At the end of the cycle the PLC writes the virtual output states to the real outputs.

>

Profibus

PROFIBUS (Process Field Bus) is a standard for →fieldbus communication in automation technology. There are two versions of PROFIBUS, DP being the one most widely used.

PROFIBUS-DP (decentralised periphery) for the control of sensors and actuators by a central controller in manufacturing engineering and for networking of several controllers among each other. Data rates up to 12 Mbits/s on twisted two-wire cables and/or fibre optics are possible.

PROFIBUS-PA (process automation) is used for the control of measurement devices by a process control system in process technology and is suited for hazardous areas (zones 0 and 1). Only a limited current flows on the bus cables in an intrinsically safe circuit so that even in case of a problem no explosive sparks can occur. A disadvantage of PROFIBUS-PA is the relatively slow data transfer rate of 31.25 Kbits/s.

www.profibus.com (umbrella organisation)

>

Profinet

PROFINET (Process Field Network) is the open Industrial Ethernet Standard of Profibus

& Profinet International (PI) for automation. Profinet uses TCP/IP and IT standards, is real-time Ethernet compatible and enables the integration of fieldbus systems.

The Profinet concept has a modular design, so that the user can choose the functionality himself. This is basically different as regards the type of data exchange, to meet the requirements regarding the speed.

For Profinet, there are the two perspectives Profinet-CBA and Profinet-IO:

Profinet-CBA (Component Based Automation) is intended for the component-based communication via TCP/IP and the real-time communication for real-time requirements in modular plant construction. Both ways of communication can be used in parallel.

Profinet-IO has been created for real-time (RT) and synchronous communication IRT (IRT = isochronous real-time) with the decentralised periphery. The designations RT and IRT only describe the real-time characteristics in the communication within Profinet-IO.

→ www.profibus.com (umbrella organisation)

>

R

Redundant

Redundancy is the presence of more than the necessary means so that a function unit performs a requested function or that data can represent information.

Several kinds of redundancy are distinguished:

Functional redundancy aims at designing safety-related systems in multiple ways in parallel so that in the event of a →failure of one component the others ensure the task.

In addition it is tried to separate redundant systems from each other with regard to space. Thus the →risk that they are affected by a common interference is minimised.

Finally, components from different manufacturers are sometimes used to avoid that a systematic fault causes all redundant systems to fail (→diverse redundancy).



358


Glossary of Terms

The software of redundant systems should differ in the following aspects: • specification (different teams), • specification language, • programming (different teams), • programming language, • compiler.

>

remanent

Remanent data is protected against data loss in case of power failure. The →runtime system for example automatically copies the remanent data to a →flash memory as soon as the voltage supply falls below a critical value. If the voltage supply is available again, the runtime system loads the remanent data back to the RAM memory. The data in the RAM memory of a controller, however, is volatile and normally lost in case of power failure.

>

RPI

RPI = Requested Packet Intervall >

RTC

RTC = Real Time Clock Provides (batter-backed) the current date and time. Frequent use for the storage of error message protocols.

>

RTS

RTS = Runtime System Runtime systems are basic versions of applications. These minimum versions are supplied with certain products to meet the prerequisites for the execution of the actual product or to be able to look at or use results generated by this product on other processors: making available all routines required to execute a program in a programming language, e.g. interactions with the →runtime system, memory requirements, error routines, inputs and outputs.

>

Runtime system

Basic program in the device, establishes the connection between the hardware of the device and the application program.

>

S

SD card

An SD memory card (short for Secure Digital Memory Card) is a digital storage medium that operates to the principle of →flash storage.

>

Self-test

Test program that actively tests components or devices. The program is started by the user and takes a certain time. The result is a test protocol (log file) which shows what was tested and if the result is positive or negative.

>

SELV

SELV = Safety Extra Low Voltage Active parts of safety extra low voltage circuits must neither be connected to ground nor to protective wires of other circuits. They must be safely separated from active parts with higher voltage. SELV circuit = secondary circuit (output voltage) which is rated and protected so that its voltages do not exceed a safe value in case of correct operation (of the power supply) or in case of a single →fault (of the power supply). SELV circuits are separated from the input voltage (mains voltage) by double or enhanced insulation. The voltage value must not exceed 60 V DC (or 42.4 V AC).

>

Single slave

→Slave whose address number may only occur once on the →master.

>

Slave

Passive participant on the bus, only replies on request of the →master. Slaves have a clearly defined and unique →address in the bus.

>

Slave configuration

The following terms need to be distinguished... • AS-i projected configuration (→PCD (→ page 356)), • AS-i current configuration (→CDI (→ page 350)), • CTT projected configuration (→PCCD (→ page 356)), • CTT current configuration (→CCDI (→ page 350)).

>

359


Glossary of Terms

Symbols

Pictograms are figurative symbols which convey information by a simplified graphic representation. (→ chapter What do the symbols and formats mean?)

>

System variable

Variable to which access can be made via IEC address or symbol name from the PLC.

>

T

Target

The target contains the hardware description of the target device for CODESYS, e.g.: inputs and outputs, memory, file locations. Corresponds to an electronic data sheet.

>

TCP

The Transmission Control Protocol is part of the TCP/IP protocol family. Each TCP/IP data connection has a transmitter and a receiver. This principle is a connection-oriented data transmission. In the TCP/IP protocol family the TCP as the connection-oriented protocol assumes the task of data protection, data flow control and takes measures in the event of data loss. (compare: →UDP)

>

U

UDP

UDP (User Datagram Protocol) is a minimal connectionless network protocol which belongs to the transport layer of the internet protocol family. The task of UDP is to ensure that data which is transmitted via the internet is passed to the right application. At present network variables based on →CAN and UDP are implemented. The values of the variables are automatically exchanged on the basis of broadcast messages. In UDP they are implemented as broadcast messages, in CAN as →PDOs. According to the protocol, these services are unconfirmed data transmission: it is not checked whether the receiver receives the message. Exchange of network variables corresponds to a "1 to n connection" (1 transmitter to n receivers).

>

Unit ID

→Modbus

>

Use, intended

Use of a product in accordance with the information provided in the instructions for use.

>

W

Watchdog

In general the term watchdog is used for a component of a system which watches the function of other components. If a possible malfunction is detected, this is either signalled or suitable program branchings are activated. The signal or branchings serve as a trigger for other co-operating system components to solve the problem.

360


Index

10 Index

A

A/B slave .............................................................................................. 349

Acyclic data ................................................................................. 157, 217

Acyclic data records............................................................................. 220

Acyclic data transmission .................................................................... 349

Add AC142n to the project ......................................................... 336, 341

Additional functions................................................................................ 40

Address ................................................................................................ 349

Address assignment in Ethernet networks .......................................... 132

Adopt the system time of the PC ........................................................... 83

Analogue input ....................................................................................... 61

Analogue output ..................................................................................... 62

Appendix .............................................................................................. 126

Application software............................................................................. 349

Approval tests / certifications ............................................................... 127

Architecture .......................................................................................... 349

Arrow and function keys ........................................................................ 17

Arrow keys ............................................................................................. 21

AS-i ...................................................................................................... 349

AS-i 1 / AS-i 2 ........................................................................................ 56

AS-i slaves ..................................................................................................... 61

Diagnosis ....................................................................................................... 59

Master setup .................................................................................................. 57

AS-i cycle ............................................................................................. 349

AS-i master .......................................................................................... 136

AS-i master commands ....................................................................... 268

AS-i master status flags ....................................................................... 140

AS-i phases (status machine).............................................................. 349

AS-i slaves ........................................................................................... 144

ASIsafe ................................................................................................ 350

Assembly Instance............................................................................... 350

B

Baud ..................................................................................................... 350

Behaviour of the settings upon firmware update ................................. 114

Binary field ............................................................................................. 38

Burst errors .......................................................................................... 350

Bus ....................................................................................................... 350

Button ..................................................................................................... 28

C

Carry out a projection adaptation .......................................................... 58

CCDI .................................................................................................... 350

CDI ....................................................................................................... 350

Change an AS-i slave address .............................................................. 65

Change an AS-i slave parameter output ............................................... 65

Change the analogue output values manually ...................................... 63

Change the basic settings of the device ............................................. 112

Change the digital output values manually ........................................... 63

Change the Extended ID1 of the AS-i slave .......................................... 66

Checkbox ............................................................................................... 28

CIP ....................................................................................................... 350

Clone device configuration .................................................................... 84

CODESYS ........................................................................................... 350

CODESYS PLC ..................................................................................... 17

Combined transaction .......................................................................... 153

Combined transaction – Use of analogue channels in the gateway depending on the slave profile ............................................................ 153

Command 07 (0x0007) - Set the auto address mode of the AS-i master .................................................................................................. 281

Command 01 (0x0001) – Change parameters of an AS-i slave ......... 274

Command 03 (0x0003) – Project the currrent AS-i network ............... 276

Command 04 (0x0004) – Change LPS ............................................... 277

Command 05 (0x0005) – Change the operating mode of the AS-i master .................................................................................................. 278

Command 06 (0x0006) – Change AS-i slave address ........................ 279

Command 09 (0x0009) – Change extended ID1 in the AS-i slave ..... 282

Command 10 (0x000A) - Change PCD ............................................... 284

Command 13 (0x000D) – AS-i master supply voltage, symmetry, earth fault ...................................................................................................... 287

Command 21 (0x0015) – Read ID string of an AS-i profile (S-7.4) .... 289

Command 257 (0x0101) – Quick setup AS-i master 1 + 2 ................. 251

Command 259 (0x0103) – Select user language................................ 253

Command 26 (0x001A) – Read AS-i master info ................................ 292

Command 260 (0x0104) – Change display settings ........................... 255

Command 261 (0x0105) – Set output control ..................................... 256

Command 262 (0x0106) – Set PLC operating mode .......................... 257

Command 265 (0x0109) – Set date/time ............................................ 258

Command 266 (0x010A) – Set parameters of the NTP server ........... 260

Command 267 (0x010B) – Read date / time / NTP settings ............... 262

Command 268 (0x010C) – Reboot system ......................................... 264

Command 269 (0x010D) – Read fieldbus info .................................... 266

Command 272 (0x0110) – Display target visualisation ....................... 267

Command 28 (0x001C) – Deactivate slave reset when changing to the protected mode .................................................................................... 293

Command 33 (0x0021) - Read diagnosis string of an AS-i slave (S-7.4) ............................................................................................................. 294

Command 34 (0x0022) - Read parameter string of an AS-i slave (S-7.4) ............................................................................................................. 296

Command 35 (0x0022) - Write parameter string of an AS-i slave (S-7.4) ............................................................................................................. 298

Command 36 (0x0024) – CTT2 Standard ........................................... 300

Command 37 (0x0025) – CTT2 standard write ................................... 302

Command 38 (0x0026) – CTT2 Vendor Specific Read ...................... 304

Command 39 (0x0027) – CTT2 Vendor Specific Write ....................... 306

Command 64 (0x0040) – CTT2 device group read ............................ 308

Command 65 (0x0041) – CTT2 Device Group Write .......................... 310

Command 66 (0x0042) – CTT2 Vendor Specific Selective Read From Buffer ................................................................................................... 312

Command 67 (0x0043) – CTT2 Vendor Specific Selective Write From Buffer ................................................................................................... 314

Command 68 (0x0044) – CTT2 Vendor Specific Selective Read ....... 316

Command 69 (0x0045) – CTT2 Vendor Specific Selective Write ....... 318

Command 70 (0x0046) – CTT2 device group selective Rread ........... 320

Command 71 (0x0047) – CTT2 Device Group Selective Write .......... 322

Command 73 (0x0049) – CTT2 Vendor Specific Exchange ............... 324

Command 74 (0x004A) – CTT2 Device Group Exchange .................. 326

Command 75 (0x004B) – CTT2 Device Group Selective Read From Buffer ................................................................................................... 328

Command 76 (0x004C) – CTT2 Device Group Selective Write From Buffer ................................................................................................... 330

Command 80 (0x0050) – Adjust AS-i master settings ........................ 332

Command 81 (0x0051) – Reset error counter .................................... 333

Command channels ............................................................................. 247

Command reply channel (device >>> fieldbus master) ...................... 267

Command request channel (fieldbus master >>> device) 251, 253, 255, 256, 257, 258, 260, 262, 264, 266, 267, 274, 276, 277, 278, 279, 281,

361


Index

282, 284, 287, 289, 292, 293, 294, 296, 298, 300, 302, 304, 306, 308, 310, 312, 314, 316, 318, 320, 322, 324, 326, 328, 330, 332, 333

Command response channel (device >>> fieldbus master) ..... 252, 254, 255, 256, 257, 259, 261, 263, 265, 266, 275, 276, 277, 278, 280, 281, 283, 286, 288, 290, 292, 293, 295, 297, 299, 301, 303, 305, 307, 309, 311, 313, 315, 317, 319, 321, 323, 325, 327, 329, 331, 332, 333

Command status .................................................................................. 248

Configuration data (CDI) of the slaves (slave profiles) ....................... 146

Configuration interface ........................................................................ 111

connection concepts ................................................................................... 133

Configuration mode ............................................................................. 335

Independent................................................................................................. 341

Top-down ..................................................................................................... 336

Configuration of the analogue channels in slots 9 ... 12 ..................... 193

Configure the IP parameters automatically .....................................90, 97

Configure the IP parameters manually ............................................90, 97

Confirmation message ........................................................................... 35

Connect and address AS-i slaves ....................................................... 118

Connect the device .............................................................................. 111

Connection ........................................................................................... 350

Connection via Ethernet network ........................................................ 135

Control a single PLC application ........................................................... 70

Control of the graphical user interface .................................................. 20

Control PLC applications ....................................................................... 71

ControllerE ........................................................................................... 350

CTT ...................................................................................................... 350

CTT2 error object ................................................................................. 273

Cycle time ............................................................................................ 351

Cyclic data .................................................................................. 157, 181

Cyclic data transmission ...................................................................... 351

Cyclical polling ..................................................................................... 351

D

DAE/EE flags ....................................................................................... 143

Data image (AS-i) ................................................................................ 351

Data type.............................................................................................. 351

Derivation of parameter values for free slave assignment .................. 180

Description of the control elements ....................................................... 26

Description of the extended ID code 1 ................................................ 148

Description of the extended ID code 2 ................................................ 149

Description of the ID code (selection) ................................................. 148

Description of the IO code for digital slaves ........................................ 147

Details 4 channels per analogue slave....................................... 229, 230

Details of the 5-word areas ......................................................... 225, 227

Details of the error lists ........................................................................ 244

Details of the slave lists .............................................................. 233, 234

Device temperature ............................................................................... 87

DeviceNet ............................................................................................ 351

Device-specific parameters ........................................................ 159, 164

DHCP ................................................................................................... 351

Diagnosis ............................................................................................. 351

Diagnosis - AS-i master 1

AS-i diagnosis ..................................................................................... 200, 204

configuration error ............................................................................... 210, 212

list of detected slaves (LDS) ............................................................... 209, 212

list of missing slaves ................................................................................... 204

List of missing slaves .................................................................................. 201

list of multiple addressed slaves ......................................................... 202, 204

List of non-projected slaves ................................................................ 201, 204

list of peripheral faults ................................................................................. 204

List of peripheral faults ................................................................................ 202

List of slaves with wrong slave profile................................................. 201, 204

Master flags ......................................................................................... 209, 212

peripheral fault (LPF)........................................................................... 210, 212

Diagnosis - AS-i master 2

AS-i diagnosis.............................................................................................. 205

configuration error ....................................................................................... 214

list of detected slaves (LDS) ....................................................................... 213

list of missing slaves.................................................................................... 205

list of multiple addressed slaves ................................................................. 207

List of non-projected slaves ........................................................................ 206

list of peripheral faults ................................................................................. 206

List of slaves with wrong slave profile......................................................... 206

Master flags ................................................................................................. 213

peripheral fault (LPF)................................................................................... 214

Diagnosis - system diagnosis ..................................................... 199, 204

Digital input ............................................................................................ 61

Digital output .......................................................................................... 62

Direct link ............................................................................................. 134

Disconnect from web interface .............................................................. 43

Display ................................................................................................... 17

Display and reset performance data ..................................................... 60

Display and reset the error counters ..................................................... 59

Display diagnostic data ..................................................................87, 103

Display elements ...........................................................................17, 129

Display EtherNet/IP data ....................................................................... 94

Display information about PLC projects ................................................ 69

Display power-on time ........................................................................... 87

Display the error statistics of the AS-i slaves ........................................ 59

Display the input/output data of the AS-i slave ..................................... 61

Display the module configuration .......................................................... 94

Display the status of the CODESYS PLC ............................................. 69

Display the voltage supply analysis ....................................................... 60

Download the device and I/O description .............................................. 95

DRAM .................................................................................................. 352

DS1 – System information ................................................................... 222

DS10 – Slave list LPS ....................................................................... 234

DS11 – Current configuration data CDI............................................... 235

DS12 – Projected configuration data PCD .......................................... 237

DS13 – Image of the input parameters of the slaves .......................... 239

DS14 – Image of the output parameters of the slaves ........................ 240

DS15 – Slave error counter, configuration error counter, AS-i cycle counter ................................................................................................. 241

DS17 – Error lists LCEMS, LCEAS, LDAE ......................................... 244

DS18 – Fieldbus information ............................................................... 245

DS2 – Digital inputs of the slaves and master flags ............................ 223

DS3 – Analogue inputs of slaves 1(A)...15(B) ..................................... 224

DS4 – Analogue inputs of slaves 16(A)...31(B) ................................... 226

DS5 – Digital outputs of the slaves ..................................................... 228

DS6 – Analogue outputs of slaves 1(A)...15(B) .................................. 229

DS7 – Analogue outputs of slaves 16(A)...31(B) ................................ 230

DS8 – Status of the analogue output data of the slaves 1...31 ........... 231

DS9 – Slave lists LAS, LDS, LPF, LCE ............................................... 233

E

EDS ...................................................................................................... 352

EDS-file ................................................................................................ 180

EMC ..................................................................................................... 352

Enable/Disable the device-internal PLC ................................................ 76

Error codes of the AS-i master commands ......................................... 271

Ethernet ............................................................................................... 352

Ethernet configuration interface ............................................................ 18

362


Index

EtherNet/IP

Diagnosis ..................................................................................................... 103

Information ..................................................................................................... 93

Setup ............................................................................................................. 96

EtherNet/IP fieldbus interface ................................................................ 18

EtherNet/IP interface ........................................................................... 111

EtherNet/IP modules............................................................................ 182

Example ................................................................................................. 24

structure of the digital input data ................................................................. 187

Examples ............................................................................................. 180

Exchange AS-i slave............................................................................ 119

Execution control flags ........................................................................ 141

Explicit Messaging ............................................................................... 352

Extended ID code 2 for analogue slaves with profile 7.3.x ................. 149

Extended ID code 2 for analogue slaves with profile 7.4.x ................. 149

Extended ID-Code 1 ............................................................................ 148

Extended ID-Code 2 ............................................................................ 149

F

FC ........................................................................................................ 352

FE – functional earth ........................................................................... 352

Fieldbus ............................................................................................... 352

Fieldbus EtherNet/IP............................................................................ 155

Fieldbus objects ................................................................................... 156

Fieldbus parameters ............................................................................ 158

Firmware .............................................................................................. 352

Firmware update from SD card ........................................................... 115

Firmware update via the web interface ............................................... 116

Flash memory ...................................................................................... 352

FMEA ................................................................................................... 353

FRAM ................................................................................................... 353

Free slave addresses

colour code + symbols .................................................................................. 33

Free slave addresses, overview ............................................................ 33

Function keys ......................................................................................... 21

G

Gateway ............................................................................................... 353

Gateway transfer time ......................................................................... 353

General .................................................................................................. 40

General error codes ............................................................................. 272

Getting started ......................................................................................... 8

GSD ..................................................................................................... 353

GSDML ................................................................................................ 353

H

HMI ...................................................................................................... 353

Host ...................................................................................................... 353

Host flags ............................................................................................. 142

Housing ................................................................................................ 129

I

I&M ....................................................................................................... 354

I/O adapter ........................................................................................... 354

I/O scanner .......................................................................................... 354

ID ......................................................................................................... 354

ID code ................................................................................................. 148

IEC 61131 ............................................................................................ 354

ifm system solutions ............................................................................ 104

ifm weltweit • ifm worldwide • ifm à l’échelle internationale ................. 365

Implicit Messaging ............................................................................... 354

Information concerning the device ........................................................ 15

Information on AS-i .............................................................................. 348

Install multi app .................................................................................... 108

Install single/basic app ........................................................................ 107

Instructions .......................................................................................... 354

Intended use ..................................................................................14, 354

Interfaces ................................................................................ 18, 88, 130

Configuration interface .................................................................................. 89

EtherNet/IP interface ..................................................................................... 92

IO code ................................................................................................ 147

IO-Link ................................................................................................. 354

IP address ............................................................................................ 354

J

Jitter ..................................................................................................... 354

L

LAS ...................................................................................................... 354

LDS ...................................................................................................... 354

LED ...................................................................................................... 354

Legal and copyright information .............................................................. 6

LFS ...................................................................................................... 354

Link ...................................................................................................... 355

List ......................................................................................................... 29

LKCS .................................................................................................... 355

LNACS ................................................................................................. 355

Locate error sources ............................................................................ 122

LPS ...................................................................................................... 355

LSB ...................................................................................................... 355

M

MAC-ID ................................................................................................ 355

Mapping of the digital input/output data .............................................. 187

Master .................................................................................................. 355

Master flags ......................................................................................... 139

Master-slave communication ............................................................... 355

MBd ...................................................................................................... 355

Meaning of the colour combinations ...................................................... 34

Meaning of the colour combinations (example

configuration error type 2) ............................................................................. 32

Menu ...................................................................................................... 44

Menu navigation .................................................................................... 22

Menu view .............................................................................................. 22

Message types ..................................................................................... 122

MMI ...................................................................................................... 355

Modbus ................................................................................................ 355

Modification history .................................................................................. 9

Module setting

AC13x7 AS-i 1 ............................................................................................. 208

AC13x7 AS-i 1+2 ......................................................................................... 211

AC1421 ........................................................................................................ 198

AC1422 ........................................................................................................ 203

MRAM .................................................................................................. 355

MSB ..................................................................................................... 356

N

Navigate on a page................................................................................ 25

Navigation aids ...................................................................................... 23

363


Index

Notes on ifm system solutions ............................................................. 105

Notes on IP settings.........................................................................89, 96

Numerical field ....................................................................................... 36

O

Online diagnosis function .................................................................... 122

Online Support Center (OSC).............................................................. 123

Open/Create a EtherNet/IP project ............................................ 336, 341

Operating elements ............................................................................... 17

Operating instructions ............................................................................ 41

Operating modes of the AS-i master ................................................... 137

Operation .......................................................................................19, 129

Option 1

Transmit fieldbus and web interface data via different networks ............... 135

Option 2

transfer fieldbus and web interface data over the same network .............. 135

Optional

adjust the IP parameters ............................................................................. 116

import the description of the inputs and outputs into the project ....... 339, 344

switch the language with a key combination ................................................ 78

OSC ..................................................................................................... 356

Show message history ................................................................................ 125

View current error messages ...................................................................... 124

OSC messages .................................................................................... 345

AS-i 1 / AS-i 2 .............................................................................................. 347

System ......................................................................................................... 346

OSSD ................................................................................................... 356

Overview

acyclic data .................................................................................................. 218

Acyclic data sets .......................................................................................... 221

AS-i master commands ............................................................................... 269

System commands ...................................................................................... 250

User documentation for AC14......................................................................... 8

Overview of free slave addresses ......................................................... 33

Overview of slave states ........................................................................ 31

P

Page view .............................................................................................. 25

Parameter data .................................................................................... 156

Parameter input ..................................................................................... 62

Parameter setting via the configuration assembly object .................... 163

Parameters

Independent mode ...................................................................................... 160

Top-down mode .......................................................................................... 161

Parameters of the fieldbus slots .......................................................... 174

Password ............................................................................................. 356

PCCD ................................................................................................... 356

PCD ..................................................................................................... 356

PDM ..................................................................................................... 356

PELV .................................................................................................... 356

Permitted use ......................................................................................... 14

Pictogram ............................................................................................. 356

PLC

Diagnosis ....................................................................................................... 73

Information ..................................................................................................... 69

Settings .......................................................................................................... 70

PLC configuration ................................................................................ 356

Please note! ........................................................................................... 11

Polling .................................................................................................. 356

Possible command error codes . 252, 254, 255, 256, 257, 259, 261, 263, 265, 266, 267, 275, 276, 277, 278, 280, 281, 283, 286, 288, 291, 292,

293, 295, 297, 299, 301, 303, 305, 307, 309, 311, 313, 315, 317, 319, 321, 323, 325, 327, 329, 331, 332, 333

Power supply connections ................................................................... 129

Power-on delay time ............................................................................ 356

Preliminary note ....................................................................................... 5

Preparations ............................................................... 115, 116, 336, 341

Principle of the command channels .................................................... 248

Process image ..................................................................................... 357

Profibus ................................................................................................ 357

Profiles of AS-i slaves .......................................................................... 145

Profinet ................................................................................................. 357

Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) ................................................ 131

Programmers' notes

call up acyclic services ................................................................................ 334

Prohibited use ........................................................................................ 14

Projection mode ................................................................................... 138

Protected mode ................................................................................... 138

Purpose of the document ........................................................................ 6

Q

Quick setup ............................................................................................ 46

Access the device via QR code .................................................................... 49

Address the AS-i slaves connected to AS-i master 1 ................................... 54

Address the AS-i slaves connected to AS-i master 2 ................................... 55

Configure the EtherNet/IP interface .............................................................. 50

Configure the operating mode of the AS-i masters ...................................... 48

Configure the output access ......................................................................... 49

Project AS-i networks .................................................................................... 47

Set the configuration interface ...................................................................... 52

Set the configuration mode ........................................................................... 51

R

Reboot the device ....................................................................... 115, 117

Recommended browsers ....................................................................... 40

Redundant ........................................................................................... 357

remanent .............................................................................................. 358

Remote access ...................................................................................... 39

Required accessories ............................................................................ 18

Required background knowledge .......................................................... 11

Restore the device configuration ........................................................... 85

RPI ....................................................................................................... 358

RTC ...................................................................................................... 358

RTS ...................................................................................................... 358

Runtime system ................................................................................... 358

S

Safety instructions ................................................................................. 10

Save the device configuration ............................................................... 84

SD card ................................................................................................ 358

SD card slot ........................................................................................... 18

Self-test ................................................................................................ 358

SELV .................................................................................................... 358

Set the behaviour of the display ............................................................ 79

Set the configuration mode.................................................................... 98

Set the device cycle ............................................................................... 77

Set the device-specific parameters ....................................................... 99

Set the device-specific parameters and the module configuration ..... 341

Set the EtherNet/IP module configuration ........................................... 101

Set the fieldbus parameters and the module configuration................. 338

Set the monitoring functions of the AS-i master .................................... 58

364


Index

Set the operating mode of the AS-i master ........................................... 57

Set the output access ............................................................................ 75

Set the system time ............................................................................... 80

Set the system time manually................................................................ 81

Setting RTC ........................................................................................... 80

Setup .................................................................................................... 110

Setup of EtherNet/IP ............................................................................ 118

Setup of the configuration interface ..................................................... 118

Show AS-i slave information.................................................................. 64

Show EtherNet information .................................................................... 91

Show information ................................................................................... 93

Show information about installed ifm apps .......................................... 106

Show memory used ............................................................................... 73

Show target visualisation ....................................................................... 72

Show version information ...................................................................... 74

Single slave ......................................................................................... 358

Slave .................................................................................................... 358

Slave addresses, free ............................................................................ 33

Slave configuration .............................................................................. 358

Slave profile ......................................................................................... 147

Slave profiles for slaves with combined transaction ........................... 153

Slave selector ........................................................................................ 30

Slave status

colour code + symbols .................................................................................. 31

overview ........................................................................................................ 31

Overview ........................................................................................................ 31

Slot 1 – Digital input data single or A slaves, AS-i master 1 ............... 183

Slot 10 – Analogue input data ............................................................. 190

Slot 11 – Analogue output data ........................................................... 191

Slot 12 – Analogue output data ........................................................... 192

Slot 13 – Diagnostic data ..................................................................... 197

Slot 14 – Inputs from PLC ................................................................... 215

Slot 15 – Outputs to PLC ..................................................................... 216

Slot 2 – Digital output data single or A slaves, AS-i master 1 ............. 183

Slot 3 – Digital input data single or A slaves, AS-i master 2 ............... 184

Slot 4 – Digital output data single or A slaves, AS-i master 2 ............. 184

Slot 5 – Digital input data B slaves, AS-i master 1 .............................. 185

Slot 6 – Digital output data B slaves, AS-i master 1 ........................... 185

Slot 7 – Digital input data B slaves, AS-i master 2 .............................. 186

Slot 8 – Digital output data B slaves, AS-i master 2 ........................... 186

Slot 9 – Analogue input data ............................................................... 189

Standard CTT2 error codes ................................................................. 273

Start screen ........................................................................................... 45

Start screen 'Basic settings' ................................................................. 111

Start the recovery mode ............................................................. 115, 116

Start-up behaviour of the controller ....................................................... 12

Status LED ........................................................................................... 121

Basic device ................................................................................................ 121

fieldbus EtherNet/IP .................................................................................... 121

Status LEDs ........................................................................................... 17

Store diagnostic protocol ....................................................................... 86

Structure of the slave profile ................................................................ 147

Switch operating modes ...................................................................... 138

Switch the menu language .................................................................... 78

Symbols ............................................................................................... 359

free slave addresses ..................................................................................... 33

slave status.................................................................................................... 31

Symbols and formats used ...................................................................... 7

Synchronise the system time with an NTP server................................. 82

System ................................................................................................... 67

Diagnosis ....................................................................................................... 87

Information ..................................................................................................... 74

Programmable Logic Controller (PLC).......................................................... 68

Setup ............................................................................................................. 75

System commands .............................................................................. 249

System description ................................................................................ 13

System reset .......................................................................................... 86

System variable ................................................................................... 359

T

Tab menu/Tab ....................................................................................... 27

Table

Fixed slave assignment for slots 9 ... 12 .................................................... 194

Master flags ................................................................................................. 188

variable slave assignment for slots 9 ... 12................................................. 196

Tampering with the unit ......................................................................... 12

Target ................................................................................................... 359

TCP ...................................................................................................... 359

Technical data ..................................................................................... 128

Transfer the set configuration to the controller (download)........ 339, 343

Troubleshooting ................................................................................... 120

Types of ifm system solutions ............................................................. 105

U

UDP ..................................................................................................... 359

Uninstall ifm apps ................................................................................ 109

Unit ID .................................................................................................. 359

Update ifm apps ................................................................................... 109

Update the firmware ................................................................... 115, 117

Update the firmware of the device ....................................................... 114

Use navigation aids ............................................................................... 25

Use, intended ....................................................................................... 359

V

Valid combinations IO code / ID code / extended ID code 2............... 150

W

watchdog.............................................................................................. 359

Watchdog ............................................................................................. 359

Web interface

Access ........................................................................................................... 41

navigation ...................................................................................................... 41

Password protection ...................................................................................... 42

Web interface login ................................................................................ 42

Where is what on the AS-i device? ....................................................... 16

11 ifm weltweit • ifm worldwide • ifm à l’échelle internationale

Version: 2015-03-06 8310

www.ifm.com • Email: [email protected]

Service hotline: 0800 / 16 16 16 (only Germany, Mo-Fr 07.00...18.00 h)

ifm Niederlassungen • Sales offices • Agences

D ifm electronic gmbh Vertrieb Deutschland

Niederlassung Nord • 31135 Hildesheim • Tel. 0 51 21 / 76 67-0

Niederlassung West • 45128 Essen • Tel. 02 01 / 3 64 75 -0

Niederlassung Mitte-West • 58511 Lüdenscheid • Tel. 0 23 51 / 43 01-0

Niederlassung Süd-West • 64646 Heppenheim • Tel. 0 62 52 / 79 05-0

Niederlassung Baden-Württemberg • 73230 Kirchheim • Tel. 0 70 21 / 80 86-0

Niederlassung Bayern • 82178 Puchheim • Tel. 0 89 / 8 00 91-0

Niederlassung Ost • 07639 Tautenhain • Tel. 0 36 601 / 771-0

ifm electronic gmbh • Friedrichstraße 1 • 45128 Essen

A

OFF

B, L

BR

CH

CN

CND

CZ

DK

E

F

FIN

GB, IRL

GR

H

I

IL

IND

J

MAL

MEX

N

NL

P

PL

RA, ROU

ROK

RP

RUS

S

SGP

SK

THA

TR

UA

USA

ZA

ifm electronic gmbh • 1120 Wien • Tel. +43 16 17 45 00

ifm efector pty ltd. • Mulgrave Vic 3170 • Tel. +61 3 00 365 088

ifm electronic N.V. • 1731 Zellik • Tel. +32 2 / 4 81 02 20

ifm electronic Ltda. • 03337-000, Sao Paulo SP • Tel. +55 11 / 2672-1730

ifm electronic ag • 4 624 Härkingen • Tel. +41 62 / 388 80 30

ifm electronic (Shanghai) Co. Ltd. • 201203 Shanghai • Tel. +86 21 / 3813 4800

ifm efector Canada inc. • Oakville, Ontario L6K 3V3 • Tel. +1 800-441-8246

ifm electronic spol. s.r.o. • 25243 Průhonice • Tel. +420 267 990 211

ifm electronic a/s • 2605 BROENDBY • Tel. +45 70 20 11 08

ifm electronic s.a. • 08820 El Prat de Llobregat • Tel. +34 93 479 30 80

ifm electronic s.a. • 93192 Noisy-le-Grand Cedex • Tél. +33 0820 22 30 01

ifm electronic oy • 00440 Helsinki • Tel . +358 75 329 5000

ifm electronic Ltd. • Hampton, Middlesex TW12 2HD • Tel. +44 208 / 213-0000

ifm electronic Monoprosopi E.P.E. • 15125 Amaroussio • Tel. +30 210 / 6180090

ifm electronic kft. • 9028 Györ • Tel. +36 96 / 518-397

ifm electronic s.a. • 20041 Agrate-Brianza (MI) • Tel. +39 039 / 68.99.982

Astragal Ltd. • Azur 58001 • Tel. +972 3 -559 1660

ifm electronic India Branch Office • Kolhapur, 416234 • Tel. +91 231-267 27 70

efector co., ltd. • Chiba-shi, Chiba 261-7118 • Tel. +81 043-299-2070

ifm electronic Pte. Ltd • 47100 Puchong Selangor • Tel. +603 8063 9522

ifm efector S. de R. L. de C. V. • Monterrey, N. L. 64630 • Tel. +52 81 8040-3535

Sivilingeniør J. F. Knudtzen A/S • 1396 Billingstad • Tel. +47 66 / 98 33 50

ifm electronic b.v. • 3843 GA Harderwijk • Tel. +31 341 / 438 438

ifm electronic s.a. • 4410-136 São Félix da Marinha • Tel. +351 223 / 71 71 08

ifm electronic Sp. z o.o. • 40-106 Katowice • Tel. +48 32-608 74 54

ifm electronic s.r.l. • 1107 Buenos Aires • Tel. +54 11 / 5353 3436

ifm electronic Ltd. • 140-884 Seoul • Tel. +82 2 / 790 5610

Gram Industrial, Inc. • 1770 Mantilupa City • Tel. +63 2 / 850 22 18

ifm electronic • 105318 Moscow • Tel. +7 495 921-44-14

ifm electronic a b • 41250 Göteborg • Tel. +46 31 / 750 23 00

ifm electronic Pte. Ltd. • Singapore 609 916 • Tel. +65 6562 8661/2/3

ifm electronic s.r.o. • 835 54 Bratislava • Tel. +421 2 / 44 87 23 29

SCM Allianze Co., Ltd. • Bangkok 10 400 • Tel. +66 02 615 4888

ifm electronic Ltd. Sti. • 34381 Sisli/Istanbul • Tel. +90 212 / 210 50 80

TOV ifm electronic • 02660 Kiev • Tel. +380 44 501 8543

ifm efector inc. • Exton, PA 19341 • Tel. +1 610 / 5 24-2000

ifm electronic (Pty) Ltd. • 0157 Pretoria • Tel. +27 12 345 44 49

Technische Änderungen behalten wir uns ohne vorherige Ankündigung vor. We reserve the right to make technical alterations without prior notice.

Nous nous réservons le droit de modifier les données techniques sans préavis.

http://www.ifm.com/

Date post:	02-Feb-2019
Category:	Documents
Upload:	dinhtuyen
View:	239 times
Download:	0 times

Device Manual with EtherNet/IP interface - ifm · ifm Device Manual SmartSPS AC14 with EtherNet/IP...

Documents